Jmhma 11.p65 2005 Tucson

User Manual: 2005-tucson

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 273

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2005

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warranty
New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)
Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty
Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicle
California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)
Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicle
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility
to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.
When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.
Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01JM-AAT

Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
A030A01JM

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any
time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai
models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard
equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who
drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which
we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai
dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may
be required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave
the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:

Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not
meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appear
in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in
any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor
Company.

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety
or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.
Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation
and other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an
improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this
reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.
These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if
the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is
not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part
is not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts
used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, performance,
and reliability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and
built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Using imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage parts is not covered under the
Hyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty or
any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any
damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai
Parts caused by the installation or failure of

A100A01L

To find the closest authorized dealer call
1-800-826-CARS

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing
Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on
the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the United
States are packaged with labels written only
in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through
authorized Hyundai Dealerships.

A100A03L

A100A02L

A100A04L

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
B250A01JM-AAT

B250A01JM-U

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)
4WD Lock Switch (If installed)
Traction Control System (TCS) Switch (If installed) /
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Switch (If installed)
Instrument Cluster
Multi-Function Light Switch (If installed)
Front Window Defroster (If installed)
Hazard Warning Light Switch
Digital Clock
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

10. Rear Defroster and Outside Rearview Mirror Heater Switch
(If installed)
11. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed)
12. Passenger's Airbag
13. Hood Release Lever
14. Horn and Driver's Airbag
15. Small Article Tray / Ashtray (If installed)
16. Cruise Control Switch (If installed)
17. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If installed)
18. Shift Lever (If installed)
19. Glove Box

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor
on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,
instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these
areas, wash them with water immediately.

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
B255A01JM-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Malfunction Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime
High Beam Indicator Light

Traction Control Indicator Light
(If installed)
Electronic Stability Program Indicator
Lights (If installed)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Cruise Indicator (If installed)

Parking Brake/Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

SET Indicator Light (If installed)

Charging System Warning Light

4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

Tail Gate Open Warning Light

4WD Lock Indicator Light (If installed)

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime (If installed)
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-44.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2
Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3
Keys .............................................................................. 1-3
Door .............................................................................. 1-4
Power Windows .......................................................... 1-11
Seats ........................................................................... 1-12
Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-17
Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-23
Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) system ................. 1-30
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-42
Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-44
Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-52
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-54
Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-60
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-65
How to use Luggage Room ........................................ 1-71
Hood Release ............................................................. 1-77
Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-80
Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-84
Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-101
Audio System ............................................................ 1-103
Antenna ..................................................................... 1-135

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
B010A04A-AAT

B010B01A-AAT

B010D01A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

What About Gasohol?

Do Not Use Methanol

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline
and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used
in your Hyundai. However, if your engine develops driveability problems, the use of 100%
unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with
unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols
other than ethanol, should not be used.

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should
not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel
can reduce vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.

UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE
B010A01JM

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane
Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)
or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

CAUTION:

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle
shut off when refueling.
o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap
clicks, otherwise "
" light may illuminate.

Hyundai recommends that fuels containing
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should not
be used in your Hyundai.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen
Content 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard
starting.

CAUTION:

Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems that
are caused by the use of fuels containing
methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

BREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI
B010E01A-AAT

B020A01S-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recommends that you use gasolines treated with
detergent additives, which help prevent deposit
formation in the engine. These gasolines will
help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System.

No formal "break-in" procedure is required with
your new Hyundai. However, you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of
your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000
km).

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries
If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another
country, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).
o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,
or revolutions per minute) between 2,000
rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start
quickly or depress the accelerator pedal
fully.
o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoid
hard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't
drive so slowly in too high a gear that the
engine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed
from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes
at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles
(2,000 km) of operation.

KEYS

1
3

B030A01A-AAT

B030A01HR

For greater convenience, the same key operates all the locks in your Hyundai. However,
because the doors can be locked without a key,
carrying a spare key is recommended in case
you accidentally lock one key inside the car.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
DOOR LOCKS

4
B030B01A-AAT

B030C01JM-AAT

Record Your Key Number

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH
(If installed)

B040A01A-AAT

B030B01HR

A code number is stamped on the number plate
that came with the keys to your Hyundai. This
key number plate should not be left with the keys
but kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. The
key number should also be recorded in a place
where it can be found in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you should lose
your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can
make new keys if you can supply the key
number.

B030C01E-1

Whenever either front door is opened, the ignition switch will be illuminated for your convenience, provided the ignition switch is not in the
"ON" position.
The light will go off approximately 10 seconds
after closing the door or when the ignition switch
is turned on.

WARNING:

o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Before you drive away (especially if there
are children in the car), be sure that all the
doors are securely closed and locked so
that the doors cannot be opened from
the inside. This helps ensure that the
doors will not be opened accidentally.
Also, when combined with the proper
use of seat belts, locking the doors helps
keep occupants from being ejected from
the car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always look for
and avoid oncoming traffic.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
5

B040B01JM-AAT

B040C02O-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors with a
key

Locking From the Outside
(Driver's side - without key)

NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
driver's door to the "LOCK" position,
only the driver's door can be locked.
o If your vehicle is equipped with the central door locking system, the door will
not lock if the key is left in the ignition
switch when the front doors are closed.
o When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition
key left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, always
remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and the tail gate
when leaving your vehicle unattended.

UNLOCK
LOCK

HJM2007

o The door can be locked or unlocked with a
key.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward the
front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the
key toward the rear.

NOTE:
The driver's door can be unlocked by turning the key once toward the rear. If you wish
to unlock all doors, turn the key again
toward the rear within 4 seconds. The
passenger's side will lock or unlock all
doors with just one rotation.

B040C01JM

The doors can be locked without a key. To lock
the doors, first push the inside lock switch to the
"LOCK" position so that the red mark on the
switch is not visible, then close the door.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6
B040D01O-AAT

B045C01JM-AAT

Locking From the Inside
(Driver's side)

Locking From the Outside
(Passenger's side - Without key)

UNLOCK

LOCK

HJM2008

To lock the door from the inside, simply close the
door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"
position.

NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
driver's door to the "LOCK" position,
only the driver's door can be locked.
o When the door is locked, the red mark on
the switch is not visible.
o The driver's door can be opened by
pulling the inside door handle even if the
lock switch is depressed.

B045C01JM

The door can be locked without a key. To lock
the door, first push the inside lock switch to the
"LOCK" position so that the red mark on the
switch is not visible, then close the door.

NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" position, only the passengers door will be
locked.
o If your vehicle is equipped with the central door locking system, the door will
not lock if the key is left in the ignition
switch when the front doors are closed.
o When locking the door this way, be careful not to lock the door with the ignition
key left in the vehicle.
o To reduce the chances of theft, always
remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors and the tail gate
when leaving your vehicle unattended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
7

B045D01JM-AAT

B040E04A-AAT

B040G02HP-AAT

Locking From the Inside
(Passenger's side)

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Central Door Locks

UNLOCK
LOCK

HJM2011
HJM2008-D

To lock the door from the inside, simply close the
door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"
position. When this is done, neither the outside
nor the passenger's inside door handles can be
used.

NOTE:
o When pushing the lock switch of the
passenger's door to the "LOCK" position, only the passenger's door locks.
o When the door is locked, the red mark on
the switch is not visible.

Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side
"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lock
mechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot be
opened from the inside. Its use is recommended
whenever there are small children in the rear
seat.
To engage the child-protector feature so that
the door cannot be opened from the inside,
move the child-protector lever to the "
"
position and close the door. Move the lever to
the opposite direction of "
" position when
normal door operation is desired.
To open the door from the outside, pull the
outside door handle.

HJM2009

The central door locking switch is located on
the driver's arm rest. It is operated by depressing the door lock switch.

NOTE:
o When pushing the front portion of the
driver's door lock switch, all vehicle
doors will lock. If any door is open when
the switch is depressed, the door will
remain locked when closed.
o When pushing the rear portion of the
switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
o The central door locking is operated by
turning the key in the driver's door lock
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

8
B070F02O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed)
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.

Locking doors
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter.
3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal
lights will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.

Unlocking doors
1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,
the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.

B070A01A-AAT

(If installed)
This system is designed to provide protection
from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages : the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage
and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm
with blinking of the turn signal lights.
B075B01O-AAT

Armed Stage

NOTE:
If you wish to unlock all doors, press the
"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again
within 4 seconds.
LOCK

UNLOCK

B070B01JM

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
9

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch.
2) Make sure that the hood and tail gate are
closed and latched.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the
keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the turn
signal lights will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.

NOTE:
o If any door, the tail gate or engine hood
remains open, the system will not be
armed. If this happens, rearm the system
as described above.
o If the "LOCK" button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds after pushing the
"LOCK" button on the transmitter, the
siren will sound once to indicate that the
system is armed.

B075C01JM-AAT

B075D01JM-AAT

Alarm Stage

Disarmed Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the following
occurs while the car is parked and the system
is armed.

The system will be disarmed by using the
transmitter or the ignition key.

1) A front or rear door is opened without using
the transmitter or the ignition key.
2) The tail gate is opened without using the
transmitter or the ignition key.
3) The hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the turn signal lights will
blink continuously for about 30 seconds (This
will repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,
unlock the door or tail gate using the transmitter
or the ignition key.

CAUTION:

Avoid trying to start the engine while the
system is armed.

CAUTION:

Do not arm the system until all passengers
have left the car. If the system is armed while
a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm
may be activated when the remaining
passenger(s) leaves the car.

The driver's door is unlocked by depressing
once the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
If you wish to unlock all doors, press the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter again within 4
seconds.
Whenever the step above is completed, the turn
signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the
system is disarmed.

NOTE :
The system will rearm if a door, tailgate, or
hood is not opened within 30 seconds.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
10
B075E01JM-AAT

B070E02HP-AAT

Panic Warning

Replacing the battery
When the transmitter's battery begins to get
weak, it may take several pushes on the button
to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not
light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery

Battery type : CR2032
PANIC

Replacement instructions:
Case
B070E01JM

2. Remove the old battery from the case and
note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same(+side facing
down), then insert it in the transmitter.

B075E01JM

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the back side of
the transmitter.
2. At the same time, the siren will sound and the
turn signal lights will blink for 30 seconds.
3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"
button again on the transmitter.

Screwdriver
HJM2004

1. Carefully separate the case with a blade
screwdriver as shown in the illustration.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

POWER WINDOWS

1
11

B060A03Y-AAT

HJM2017
B060A03JM

The power windows operate when the ignition
key is in the "ON" position. The main switches
are located on the driver's armrest and control
the front and rear windows on both sides of the
vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the appropriate window switch and
closed by pulling up the switch. To open the
window on the driver's side, press the switch
halfway down. The window moves as long as
the switch is operated. To fully open the driver's
window automatically, press the switch fully
down. In automatic operation, the window will
fully open even if you let go of the switch. To stop
at the desired opening, pull up and release the
switch.

In order to prevent operation of the passenger
front and rear windows, a window lock switch is
provided on the armrest of the driver's door. To
disable the power windows, press the window
lock switch. To revert to normal operation,
press the window lock switch a second time.

NOTE:
The power windows can be operated for 30
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removed
from the ignition switch.
If the front doors are opened during this 30
second period, the power windows can no
longer be operated without the ignition key
turned to the "ON" position.

Open

HJM2016

WARNING:

(1) Be careful that someone's head, hands
and body are not trapped by a closing
window.
(2) Never try to operate the main switch on
the driver's door and the individual door
window switch in opposing directions
at the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be opened
or closed.
(3) Do not leave children alone in the car.
Always remove the ignition key for their
safety.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
12

SEATS
B080A01A-AAT

B080B02A-AAT

B080C02A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Adjusting Seatback Angle

WARNING:

Never attempt to adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving. This could result in loss
of control or an accident which may cause
death, serious injury, or property damage.

HJM2031

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull
the lock release lever upward. This will release
the seat on its track so you can move it forward
or rearward to the desired position. When you
find the position you want, release the lever and
slide the seat forward or rearward on its track
until it locks into the desired position and cannot
be moved further.

WARNING:

To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward
without using the lock release lever.

HJM2033

To recline the seatback, lean forward to take
your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner
control lever at the outside edge of the seat. Now
lean back until the desired seatback angle is
achieved. To lock the seatback into position,
release the recliner control lever.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
13

B080D03JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

WARNING:

To minimize risk of severe injury in the
event of a collision or a sudden stop, both
the driver and passenger seatbacks should
always be in an upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags in a
frontal collision may be reduced significantly when the seatbacks are reclined.
There is greater risk that the driver and
passenger will slide under the seat belt
which may result in serious injury if a crash
occurs when the seatbacks are reclined.
The seat belt and airbags cannot provide
proper protection to an occupant if the seat
back is reclined.

Lock Knob

WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at
the same height as the top of the
occupant's eyes. For this reason, the
use of a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not recommended.

HJM2044

Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk
of neck injuries.
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, push
it down while pressing the lock knob. To remove
the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then
press the lock knob while pulling upward. This
should only be done when the seat is not
occupied.
B080D01JM

o Do not operate vehicle with the headrests removed as injury to the occupants
may occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection
against neck injuries when properly adjusted.
o Do not adjust the headrest hejght while
the vehicle is in motion.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
14
B080F01A-AAT

B080H02JM-GAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

Seatback table

WARNING:

o Do not sit on the seatback table.
o Do not place items on the seatback table
when the vehicle is in motion.
o Do not leave items on the seatback table
when the vehicle is in motion.

B100A02JM-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If installed)

Recliner control lever
HJM2041
HJM2035

To raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion, turn the front knob forward or rearward. To raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion, turn the rear knob forward or rearward.

The seatback table is made by folding the front
passenger seat forward.

To operate the seatback table
1. Lower the headrest.
2. With the recliner control lever pulled up, fold
the front passenger seatback forward to the
flat position.
3. When returning the seatback to the upright
position, ensure the seatback is completely
locked into place.

HJM2042

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
15

The seat warmer is provided to warm the front
seats during cold weather. With the ignition key
in the "ON" position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's
seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where
the operation of the seat warmer is not needed,
keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

B085A01JM-GAT

B085B02JM-AAT

REAR SEAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle

Folding Rear Seatback
For convenience, the seatbacks and seat cushions may be folded down and up.

NOTE:
o The seat warmer will not operate if the
ambient temperature is higher than
82.4°F ± 3.5°F (28°C ± 3.5°C).
o If the seat warmer doesn't work when
ambient temperature is lower than 75.2°F
(24°C), it should be checked at an authorized dealer.

Seatback
folding lever
HJM2046

WARNING:

It is recommended that the seat heater not
be used when elderly people or people who
are ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use the
seat warmer if the occupant is sleeping.

To recline the seatback, pull the seatback
folding lever and release it after the desired
seatback angle is achieved.
When you recline the seatback to desired position, always be sure it has locked into position.

CAUTION:

When reclining the seatback, you should
adjust the seatback folding lever while
standing.

HJM2047

1. Pull the seatback folding lever then push
down the seatback.
2. Be sure it has locked into position to listen an
audible "Click".

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
16
3. To return the seatback to its normal position,
pull the seatback folding lever and reverse
the above procedure.
o When you return the seatback to its upright
position, always be sure it is locked into
position by pulling and pushing on the top of
the seatback.

!
HJM2048

NOTE:
o Before folding the seatback, place the
rear seat belt buckles in the buckle pouch
on the seatback. This will prevent the
seat belt buckles from becoming covered by the seat cushion when it is
returned to the seating position.

CAUTION:

Be careful not to overload seatback. Overloading may cause damage the seatback.

WARNING:

o The purpose of the fold-down rear seat
back is to allow you to carry larger items
than could otherwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on the
cargo area while the car is moving. This
is not a proper seating position and no
seat belts are available for use when the
seat back is folded down.
This could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or a sudden
stop. Objects should not extend higher
than the top of the front seatbacks.
This could allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

WARNING:

o When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position after being folded down,
be careful not to damage the seatbelt
webbing or buckle. In addition, do not
allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to
get caught or pinched in the rear seat.
o When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position, be sure it is locked into
position. Attempt to move it.
o Never attempt to fold or return seat while
the vehicle is moving.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

SEAT BELTS

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

B140A01B-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

WARNING:

All occupants of the vehicle must wear their
seat belts at all times. Note that this vehicle
is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint
(Airbag) System as discussed beginning
on page 1-30. The seat belts must be used
in conjunction with the supplemental
airbag system. State laws require that some
or all occupants of the vehicle use seat
belts. The possibility of increased injury or
severity of injury in an accident will be
increased if this elementary safety precaution is not observed. In addition, follow the
other instructions provided in this section.
B140A01JM

For the safety of all passengers, luggage or
other cargo should not be piled higher than the
top of the seatback.

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific requirements in
your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must
be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
Information about the use of these restraints
begins on page 1-23.

WARNING:

Every person in your vehicle needs to be
properly restrained at all times, including
infants and children. In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a "missile" inside the car. The force required to hold a
child on your lap could be so great that you
could not hold the child. Any child riding in
the vehicle should always be in a proper
restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:
Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained
in the rear seat by a child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it
meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight. Check
the label on the child restraint for this
information. See page 1-23.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
18
B150C02A-AAT

B150E01A-AAT

Larger Children

Injured Person

Children who are too large for child restraint
systems should always occupy the rear seat
and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened snug on the hips and
as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the
event of an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If
a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in
the front seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and
the seat should be placed in the rearmost
position. Children under the age of 13 should be
restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.

A seat belt should be used when an injured
person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for
recommendations.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women
The use of a seat belt is recommended for
pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury
in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap
belt portion should be placed as low and snugly
as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a
physician.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt
Two people (including children) should never
attempt to use a single seat belt. This could
increase the severity of injuries in case of an
accident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of
an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front seats should
be in an upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if
the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the
front seat is in a reclined position.

WARNING:

Sitting in a reclined position or lying down
when your vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seat
belts can't do their job when you're reclined.
The shoulder belt can't do its job because
it won't be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash
you could go into it with great force, receiving serious neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be applied there, not
at your strong pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit back in the seat and wear your seat
belt properly. See page 1-20.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
19

B160A01A-AAT

B160C01A-AAT

B170A04Y-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled
or modified. In addition, care should be taken to
assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not
damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts
become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a
mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and weaken
the fabric.

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT
SHOULDER BELT

WARNING:

When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position after the rear seatback was
folded down, be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that
the webbing or buckle does not get caught
or pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any
kind. Parts of the system that are damaged
should be replaced as soon as possible.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies
should be replaced if the vehicle has been
involved in an accident. This should be done
even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be
directed to your Hyundai Dealer.

HJM2050

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt
anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near
your neck, you will not be getting the most
effective protection. The shoulder portion should
be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and
midway over your shoulder nearest the door
and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,
lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull
it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the
height adjuster button.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
20

o The height adjuster must be in the locked
position when the vehicle is moving.
o The misadjustment of height of the
shoulder belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There
will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into
the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly around your hips.
If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the
belt will extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will
lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean
forward too quickly.

B180A01A-AAT

NOTE:

Release the button to lock the anchor into
position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make
sure that it has locked into the position.

WARNING:

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System with
Emergency Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt

B180A01L

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
the ignition key is in the "ON" position, the
seat belt warning light will flash and the
warning chime will sound for approximately
six seconds.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and Rear
Seat 3-Point System with Combination
Locking Retractor
Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is also installed
in the front passenger seat position, Hyundai
strongly recommends that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant
restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the features of
both an emergency locking retractor seat belt
and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There
will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into
the buckle. When not securing a child restraint,
the seat belt operates in the same way as the
driver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly
around your hips. When the seat belt is fully
extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt
operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but
not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor
Type). See page 1-27.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
21

NOTE:

B200A01A-AAT

Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated
passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, it is recommended
that seated passengers use the emergency
locking feature for improved convenience.
The automatic locking function is intended
to facilitate child restraint installation. To
convert from the automatic locking feature
to the emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.

Adjusting Your Seat Belt
WARNING:

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A
twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is straight and not
twisted.
o Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or
hardware is damaged, replace it.

B200A01L

WARNING:

o For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must always be used
whenever the car is moving.
o Seat belts are most effective when
seatbacks are in the upright position.
o Children must always be seatbelted in
the rear seats. Never allow children to
ride in the front passanger seat.
o The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder nearest the
door for the most effective protection.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door. Wearing the belt under
the arm nearest the door could cause
serious or fatal injuries in an accident.

WARNING:

You should place the lap belt portion as low
as possible and snugly across your hips,
not on your waist. If the lap belt is located
too high on your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a collision.
Both arms should not be under or over the
belt. Rather, one should be over and the
other under, as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
22
B210A01A-AAT

B220A01JM-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat 3-Point
System With combination Locking Retractor

around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you
try to lean forward too quickly.

B210A01L

The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is
released, the belt should automatically draw
back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure
it is not twisted, then try again.

(b)

(d)

B220A02Y
B220A01JM

1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,
confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) are
latched together.
2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,
pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).
There will be an audible "click" when the tab
locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically
adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt
is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around
your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you move

WARNING:

o When using the rear seat center belt, you
must lock all metal tabs and buckles. If
any metal tab or buckle is not locked, it
will increase the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b) with the following exceptions.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
B220C01Y-AAT

B230A03O-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt
WARNING:

(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down.
(2) If transporting an object on the rear
seat may cause damage to the rear
seat center belt.
o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)
immediately after folding rear seatbacks
up.
o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from the
buckle (b) , insert a narrow-ended tool
into the groove located on the buckle
(b).
B220C01JM

When you want to release the seat belt, press
the button in the locking buckle.

B220A02JM

o In case of unlocking metal tab (a) and the
buckle (b), place metal (a) in the seat belt
clip not to make noise while driving.

WARNING:

The rear seat center belt latching mechanism is different from those for the outboard rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the outboard rear seat shoulder belts
or the rear seat center belt, make sure they
are inserted into the correct buckles to
obtain maximum protection from the seat
belt system and assure proper operation.

Children riding in the car should sit in the rear
seat and must always be properly restrained to
minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics provided by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger
children not in a child restraint should use one
of the seat belts provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific requirements in
your state. Child and/or infant safety seats must
be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the requirements of
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
Children could be injured or killed in a crash if
their restraints are not properly secured. For
small children and babies, a child seat or infant
seat must be used. Before buying a particular
child restraint system, make sure it fits your car
seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.

1
23

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
24

WARNING:

o A child restraint system must be placed
in the rear seat. Never install a child or
infant seat on the front passenger's seat.
Should an accident occur and cause the
passenger side airbag to deploy, it could
severely injure or kill an infant or child
seated in an infant or child seat. Thus
only use a child restraint in the rear seat
of your vehicle.
o A safety belt or child restraint system
can become very hot if it is left in a closed
vehicle on a sunny day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be
sure to check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
o When the child restraint system is not in
use, store it in the luggage compartment
or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in the case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
o Children who are too large to be in a child
restraint should sit in the rear seat and be
restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in
the front passanger seat.

WARNING:

o Always make sure that the shoulder belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder and
never across the neck or behind the
back. Moving the child closer toward the
seat belt buckle may help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of
the lap/shoulder belt must always be
positioned as low as possible on the
child's hips, and as snug as possible.
o If the seat belt will not properly fit the
child, Hyundai recommends the use of
an approved booster seat in the rear seat
in order to raise the child's seating height
so that the seat belt will properly fit the
child.
Before purchasing a booster seat, make
sure that it meets applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and that
it is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.
o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel
on the seat.
o Never use an infant carrier or a child
safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;
it may not provide adequate security in
an accident.

WARNING:

o Never allow a child to be held in a person's
arms while they are in a moving vehicle,
as this could result in serious injury to
the child in the event of an accident or a
sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving
vehicle does not provide the child with
any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child
is wearing a seat belt.

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System
For small children and babies, the use of a child
seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or
infant seat should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions. It is further
required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's
rear seat since this can make an important
contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided
with three child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
25

B230C05O-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System

To install the child restraint seat tether

Rear luggage compartment floor

Three child restraint hook holders are located
on the rear luggage compartment floor.

Tether
anchor cover

Child
Restraint
Hook
Holders

Child Restraint
Hook Holder

B230C05JM

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rear
luggage compartment floor.
B230C04JM

This symbol indicates the location of each user
ready tether anchorage.

Tether Strap
Hook

B230B01JM

Front of Vehicle
2. Route the child restraint seat tether strap
over the seatback.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
26
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route
the tether strap under the headrest and
between the headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the child
restraint hook holder and tighten to secure
the seat.

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat with
the "ISOFIX" system

WARNING:

o Install the Child Restraint Seat fully rearward against the seatback with the
seatback in a vertical position, not reclined.
o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child
restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the
anchorage points or tether anchor to
break, causing serious injury or death.

B230D01JM

Some child seat manufacturers make safety
seats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible child seats. These seats include two
rigid or webbing mounted attachments that
connect to two ISOFIX anchors at specific
seating positions in your vehicle. This type of
child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts
to attach the child seat for forward-facing child
seats.
ISOFIX anchors have been provided in your
vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in the
left and right outboard rear seating positions.
Their locations are shown in the illustration.
There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for the
center rear seating position.

WARNING:

o Do not install a child restraint seat at the
center of the rear seat using the vehicle's
ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not
misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child safety seat in the
middle of the rear seat position to the
ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be strong
enough to secure the child restraint seat
properly in the center of the rear seat and
may break, causing serious injury or
death.
o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a child
restraint lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may cause the
anchorage points or tether anchor to
break, causing serious injury or death.
o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible
child seat only to the appropriate locations shown.
o Always follow the installation and use
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
27

ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIX
or ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

B230F01JM-AAT

Installation on Rear Seat Center Position

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child restraint seat, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.
Also, test the safety seat before you place the
child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also try
to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the
anchors hold the seat in place.

ISOFIX Anchor

B230D02JM

The ISOFIX anchors are located between the
seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat
left and right outboard seating positions.

B230D03JM

WARNING:

If the child restraint seat is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being seriously
injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.

B235G02JM

To install a child restraint system in the center
rear seat, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely
from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will
engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking
feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but
not extend. Install the child restraint system,
buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to
take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion
of the belt is tight around the child restraint
system and the shoulder portion of the belt is
positioned so that it can not interfere with the
child's head or neck. Also, double check to be
sure that the retractor has engaged the Automatic Locking feature by trying to extend webbing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the
Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
28
B230G01O-AAT

Installation on Outboard Rear Seats

After installation of the child restraint system, try
to move it in all directions to be sure the child
restraint system is securely installed. If you need
to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the
retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and
allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passenger
Emergency Locking usage condition.

NOTE:

B235G03JM

To install a child restraint system in the outboard
rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely
from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This will
engage the seat belt retractor automatic locking
feature, which allows the seat belt to retract but
not extend. Install the child restraint system,
buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to
take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion
of the belt is tight around the child restraint
system and the shoulder portion of the belt is
positioned so that it can not interfere with the
child's head or neck. Also, double check to be
sure that the retractor has engaged the Automatic Locking feature by trying to extend webbing out of the retractor. If the retractor is in the
Automatic Locking mode, the belt will be locked.

o Before installing the child restraint system in any seating position, read the
instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.

B180B02JM-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.
The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make
sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the
occupant's body in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated
with or without airbag activation, depending on
the circumstances of a collision.

WARNING:

o If the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child restraint system can move when your vehicle turns or
stops abruptly.
o Do not install any child restraint system
in the front passenger seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the passenger
side airbag to deploy, it could severely
injure or kill an infant or child seated in
an infant or child seat. Therefore, only
use a child restraint system in the rear
seat of your vehicle.

HXG229

In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will
activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact
against the occupant's body.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
29

Driver's airbag

Passenger's
airbag

2
B180B01JM

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists
mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration.
1.
2.
3.
4.

SRS airbag warning light
Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
Buckle pre-tensioner assembly
SRS control module

WARNING:

To obtain maximum benefit from a pretensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.
2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the
correct position.

NOTE:
o Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated
in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belt may be activated with
or without airbag activation, depending
on the circumstances of a collision. The
pre-tensioners will be activated even if
the seat belts are not being worn at the
time of the collision.
o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard and
fine dust, which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating
conditions and are not hazardous.
o Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should not
be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash
all exposed skin areas thoroughly after
an accident in which the pre-tensioner
seat belts were activated.

CAUTION:

o The sensor that activates the SRS airbag
is connected with the pre-tensioner seat
AIR
belts. The SRS airbag warning light BAG
on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the ignition key has been turned to the "ON"
position, and then it should turn off.
o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of
the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag
warning light does not illuminate when
the ignition key is turned to "ON" or if it
remains illuminated after approximately
6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please have an
authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

The SRS uses a collection of sensors to gather
information about the driver's and front
passenger's seat position, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity.

B240A01E-AAT

Driver's Airbag

WARNING:

o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pretensioner seat belts must be replaced.
All seat belts, of any type, should always
be replaced after they have been worn
during a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly
mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several minutes after
they have been activated.
o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the
pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This
must be done by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt system in any
manner.
o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed
the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pretensioner seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
o Always wear seat belts when driving or
riding in a motor vehicle.

B240A01JM

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advanced
Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The
indications of the system's presence are the
letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbag
pad cover in the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel pad above the
glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side front
panel above the glove box. The purpose of the
SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the
front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system alone, in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seat position
sensors, which are installed on the seat track,
determine if the seats are fore or aft of a
reference position. Similarly, the seat belt usage
sensors determine if the driver and front
passenger's seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control the SRS
deployment based on how close the driver's
seat is to the steering wheel, how close the
passenger's seat is to the instrument panel,
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and
how severe is the impact.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to control
the airbag inflation with two levels. A first stage
level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for more
severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRS
Control Module) controls the airbag inflation.
Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
31

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with an
occupant classification system in the front
passenger's seat. The occupant classification
system detects the presence of a passenger in
the front passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's airbag under certain conditions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classification System" later in this section.

CAUTION:

If the seat position sensor is not working
AIR
properly, the SRS airbag warning light BAG
on
the instrument panel will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS airbag
system, because the SRS airbag warning
light is connected with the seat position
sensor. If the SRS airbag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, if it remains
illuminated after coming on for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the seat position sensor and the advanced SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.

WARNING:

o Modification to the seat structure can
adversely affect the seat position sensor
and cause the airbag to deploy at a
different level than should be provided.
o Do not place any objects underneath the
front seats which could damage the seat
position sensor or interfere with the
occupant classification system.
o Do not place any objects that may cause
magnetic fields near the front seats.
These may cause a malfunction of the
seat position sensor.

NOTE:
o Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the backside of the sun visor and in the glove box.
o Advanced airbags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide
enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes. Front airbags are not intended to deploy in light collisions in
which protection can be provided by the
pre-tensioner seat belt.
o If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, please
contact the Hyundai Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

WARNING:

o As its name implies, the SRS is designed
to work with, and be supplemental to,
the driver's and the passenger's three
point seat belt systems and is not a
substitute for them. Therefore, your seat
belts must be worn at all times. The
airbags deploy only in certain frontal
impact conditions severe enough to
cause significant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
o Sitting too close to a front airbag can
result in serious or fatal injury if the front
airbags inflate. Always sit as far back
from airbags as possible.
o Ignoring the SRS indicator light can result in serious or fatal injury if the airbags,
occupant classification system or pretensioners do not work properly. Have
your car checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if the SRS warning light alerts
you to a potential problem.
o The SRS is designed to deploy the front
airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle
is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The front
airbags will not deploy in side, rear or
rollover impacts. Additionally, the
airbags will only deploy once. Seat belts
must be worn at all times.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
32

WARNING:

o Front airbags are not intended to deploy
in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover
crashes. In addition, airbags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.

Rear impact

Side Impact
Rollover

B240A02JM

o The driver should sit back as far as
possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle. If you are sitting too close
to the airbag, it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates.

WARNING:

o No objects should be placed over or near
the airbag modules on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the glove box,
because any such object could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the airbags to deploy.
o If the airbags deploy, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring or other components of the SRS
system. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of the
airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o Do not install a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat position. A
child restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case of an
accident.
o Do not allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If older children (teenagers and older) must ride in the front
seat, make sure they are always properly
belted and the seat is moved back as far
as possible.

WARNING:

o For maximum safety protection in all
types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an airbag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash. Do not sit
or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag
while the vehicle is in motion.
o Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
All occupants should sit upright in their
seats with their feet on the floor until the
vehicle is parked and the ignition key is
removed.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy very
rapidly to provide protection in a crash.
If an occupant is out of position because
of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may
forcefully contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
33

B240B01JM-AAT

SRS Components and Functions
32 710 4

The SRSCM continually monitors all elements
while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal
or near-frontal impact is severe enough to
require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on
the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position or after the engine is started, after
which the SRI should go out.

B240B02L

3
8 179 4

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly
into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full inflation of
the airbags.

B240B02JM

The SRS consists of the following components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Driver's Airbag Module
Passenger's Airbag Module
Knee Bolster
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Front Impact Sensor
Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt
Usage Sensors/Buckle pre-tensioner
7. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Position Sensors
8. SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
9. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
10.Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)
11.Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(Front passenger's seat only)

B240B01L

The airbag modules are located both in the
center of the steering wheel and in the front
passenger's panel above the glove box. When
the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact
to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front airbags.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
34
Passenger's Airbag

B240B03L

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a
properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the
passenger's forward motion, reducing the
risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag immediately
starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain
forward visibility, and the ability to steer or
operate other controls.

Passenger's Airbag

B240B01JM

CAUTION:

When installing a container of liquid air
freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it
near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas
(instrument cluster, instrument panel or air
ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the
liquid from the air freshener does leak onto
these areas, wash them with water immediately.

B240B05L

WARNING:

o When the SRS is activated, there may be
a loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These
conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause
skin irritation. Wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm water
and a mild soap after an accident in
which the airbags were deployed.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
35

B990A01JM-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
WARNING:

o The SRS can function only when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the
SRS SRI does not illuminate or continuously remains on after illuminating for
about 6 seconds when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, or after
the engine is started, illuminates while
driving, the SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect
a battery terminal, turn the ignition key
to the "LOCK" position or remove the
ignition key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition
key is in the "ON" position. Failure to
heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI
to illuminate.

If your instrument panel has the indicator pictured in the following illustration, your vehicle
has an occupant classification system.
The indicator will be visible when you turn the
ignition key to START or RUN. The words
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" will be visible on
the instrument panel during the system check.
When the system check is complete, the passenger sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger's frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver's air bag and the side impact
air bags are not affected by the occupant
classification system.

NOTE:
Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint System Control Module is equipped a recording device which may record the use of the
seat belt restraint system by the driver and
front passenger in certain collisions.

The occupant classification system works with
sensors that are part of the right front
passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger's frontal air bag should be
enabled(may inflate) or not.

WARNING:

o A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger's air bag inflates.
o The safest place for children is in the rear
seat. Rearward and forward facing child
restraint and booster seats must only be
used in the rear seat.
o Children under the age of 13 must always ride in the rear seat, properly restrained in child restraints or with the
vehicle seat belts, depending upon their
size.

NOTE:

B990A01JM

Many times an indicator light is a sign that
there is a need for service. In the case of the
occupant classification system indicator, it
does not mean there is a need for service.
It informs the occupants of the status of the
right front passenger's airbag on or off.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
36
The occupant classification system is designed
to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger's
frontal air bag anytime the system senses that
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger's seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to
be enabled, the indicator will turn off and stay
turned off to remind you that the air bag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the occupant classification system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger's frontal air bag,
depending upon the person's seating posture
and body build.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger's seat, but the indicator is turned on,
it could be because that person isn't sitting
properly in the seat. The right front passenger
should sit upright, centered on the seat cushion,
with their seat belt on and legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and with the seat in
an upright position.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers,
can affect how the occupant classification system operates. Do not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the
occupant classification system.

B990B02JM-AAT

Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator
CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger's
seat or between the passenger's seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant classification system.

If your vehicle has the occupant classification
system, your instrument panel will have a passenger air bag status indicator.

WARNING
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether or not
there is an air bag for that person.

B990A01JM

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or
START, the passenger air bag status indicator
will be turned on and off for several seconds as
a system check. Then, after several more
seconds, the status indicator will be turned on
or off to let you know the status of the right front
passenger's frontal air bag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is
illuminated, it means that the right front
passenger's frontal air bag is disabled. If the
indicator is not illuminated, it means that the right
front passenger's frontal air bag is enabled.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
37

The occupant classification system can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is illuminated when the front
passenger's seat is occupied by an adult who
is seated properly sitting upright and with the
seat in an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with their seat belt on and legs comfortably extended feet on the floor, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai
dealer.
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" status indicator light is on or off under the following
conditions;
Passenger status de- "PASSENGER AIR

Right front

tected by the occupant

passenger

classification system
1. Adult *1

BAG OFF"
Status Indicator light

air bag

OFF

Enabled

Disabled

2. Child *2 or
child restraint system
3. Unoccupied (Empty)

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as
an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may detect him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.

*2) When a larger child who has outgrown a child
restraint system sits in the passenger seat,
the system may detect him/her as an adult
depending on his/her physique and posture.

WARNING:

o A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger's air bag inflates. Don't
use a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front passenger's seat.
o If the indicator and the air bag readiness
light ever illuminate at the same time, it
means that something may be wrong
with the air bag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the supplemental protection of the frontal air bag.
o If the occupant classification system is
not working properly, the SRS airbag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate because the passenger's
airbag is connected with the occupant
classification system.
o If there is a malfunction of the occupant
classification system, the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG" indicator will illuminate and
the front passenger's airbag will not
deploy in frontal crashes.

WARNING:

o If the SRS airbag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition key is turned
to "ON" position, if it remains illuminated after coming on for approximately
6 seconds, have an authorized Hyundai
dealer inspect the occupant classification system with the SRS airbag system
as soon as possible.
o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant classification system, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. The
infant or child could be severely injured
or killed by an airbag deployment in case
of an accident. A child restraint system
must never be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available lap/
shoulder belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an accident
when they are restrained by a proper
restraint system in the rear seat.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38
B990B01JM-AAT

WARNING:

o The occupant classification system can
function only when the ignition key is in
the "ON" position. If the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat is occupied by an adult who is seated properly
(sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably
extended, and feet on the floor), have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
your Hyundai dealer.
o If luggage or other objects are placed on
the front passenger's seat, the "Passenger Airbag Off" indicator may be illuminated. These conditions do not indicate
a problem.
o If an adult front seat passenger changes
their seating position(for example, not
sitting upright, sitting slouched , sitting
with legs spread, or otherwise being out
of position), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator may illuminate, and the
passenger's airbag may illuminate not
deploy in a collision. Always be sure to
sit properly in the front passenger seat
and wear the seat belt properly.

Side Impact Airbag
WARNING:

o Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don't place or attach anything on the front passenger seat. This
can adversely affect the occupant classification system.
o Do not install accessory seat covers on
the front passenger seats.

B990B02JM

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact
airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the
airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or
the front passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side
impact airbags are designed to deploy only
during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point
of impact. The side impact airbags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
39

B990C01LZ-GAT

Side airbag
sensor
HTB072

o
o
o
o

WARNING:

o The side impact airbag is supplemental
to the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute for
them. Your seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in motion. The
airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle occupants.
o For best protection from the side impact
airbag system and to avoid being injured
by the deploying side impact airbag,

o
o

Curtain Airbag
WARNING:

both front seat occupants should sit in
an upright position with the seat belt
properly fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steering wheel
at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.
The passenger's arms and hands should
be placed on their laps.
Do not use any accessory seat covers.
Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.
Do not install any accessories on or near
the side impact airbag.
Do not use excessive force on the side of
the seat.
Do not place any objects over the airbag
or between the airbag and yourself.
Do not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door and the
front seat. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury
if the supplemental side impact air bag
inflates.
To prevent unexpected deployment of
the side impact air bag that may result in
personal injury, avoid impact to the side
airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.

Curtain Airbag

HJM2056

Curtain airbags are located along both sides of
the roof rails above the front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the heads of
the front seat occupants and the rear outboard
seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain airbags are designed to deploy only
during certain side impact collisions, depending
on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.
The curtain airbags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
situations.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40
B240C01JM-AAT

SRS Care
o The SRS is virtually maintenance free and
there are no parts you can safely service by
yourself. If the SRS SRI (Service Reminder
Indicator) does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any work
on the steering wheel must be performed by
a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper
handling of the airbag system may result in
serious personal injury.

WARNING:

o Do not install a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat position.
A child restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely injured or killed
by an airbag deployment in case of an
accident.
o Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of
badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.

WARNING:

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has
been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect
the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.
o No objects should be placed over or near
the airbag modules on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the glove box,
because any such object could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the airbags to inflate.
o If the airbags inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring, or other components of the SRS
system. Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental inflation of the airbags
or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o If components of the airbag system must
be discarded, or if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety precautions
must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer
knows these precautions and can give
you the necessary information. Failure
to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal
injury.

WARNING:

o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that
this manual is transferred to the new
owner.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked
carpeting or water on the floor, don't try
to start the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not replace the bumper or the bumper
guard with the one other than the Hyundai
genuine parts. Otherwise, it can adversely affect SRS performance and lead
to an increased risk of injury.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
41

B240D01JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautions
o Never let passengers ride in the cargo
area (trunk) or on top of a folded-down
back seat. All occupants should sit upright,
fully back in their seats with their seat belts
on and their feet on the floor.
o Passengers should not move out of or
change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat
belt during a crash or emergency stop can
be thrown against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of the vehicle.
o Each seat belt is designed to restrain one
occupant. If more than one person uses the
same seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
o Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can
reduce the protection provided by the seat
belt and increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
o Passengers should not place hard or
sharp objects between themselves and
the airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objects
on your lap or in your mouth can result in
injuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbag
covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully
back in their seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor. If occupants are too
close to the airbag covers, they could be
injured if the airbags inflate.
o Do not attach or place objects on or near
the airbag covers. Any object attached to
or placed on the front or side impact airbag
covers could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags.
o Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the
operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side impact
airbags.
o Do not place items under the front seats.
Placing items under the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.
o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.
The infant or child could be seriously injured
or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and
children should be properly restrained in
appropriate child safety seats or seat belts
in the rear seat.

WARNING:

o Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a
crash.
o Always sit upright, fully back in the seat,
with your seat belt on, and your feet on
the floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.
If you modify your vehicle by changing your
vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or
side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect
the operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260A01JM-AAT

B260A01JM-U

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
43

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Tachometer
Turn Signal Indicator Light
Seat Belt Warning Light
Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System
Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)
Speedometer
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Fuel Gauge
Low Fuel Warning Light
Tail Gate Open Warning Light
Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed)/
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light (If installed)

13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If installed)
Immobilizer Warning Light (If installed)
Door Ajar Warning Light
Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If installed)
Odometer/ Trip odmeter
Trip Computer (If installed)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Charging System Warning Light
Coolant Temperature Gauge
Cruise Indicator (If installed)
4WD Lock Indicator Light
4WD System Warning Light (If installed)

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Service
Reminder Indicator (SRI)
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes
on for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position or after the engine
is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is not
working properly. If the SRI does not come on,
or continuously remains on after coming on for
about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition
key to the "ON" position or started the engine,
or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS
inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The blinking green arrows on the instrument
panel show the direction indicated by the turn
signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,
blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not
illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal
system is indicated. Your dealer should be
consulted for repairs.

B260E02O-AAT

B260G01A-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Chime
The seat belt reminder light blinks until your seat
belt is fastened when the ignition key is turned
from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START" and
the warning chime will sound for 6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light
The high beam indicator light comes on whenever the headlights are switched to the high
beam or flash position.

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:

If the low oil pressure warning light stays on
while the engine is running, serious engine
damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it
should come on when the ignition switch
is turned on, then go out when the engine
is started. If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is running, there
is a serious malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is
safe to do so, turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on with the
engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light
stays on when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by a Hyundai
dealer before the car is driven again.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
45

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid
Level Warning Light

WARNING:

If you suspect brake trouble, have your
brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. Driving your car with a
problem in either the brake electrical system or brake hydraulic system is dangerous, and could result in a serious injury or
death.

Warning Light Operation
The parking brake/brake fluid level warning light
should come on when the parking brake is
applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"
or "START". After the engine is started, the light
should go out when the parking brake is released.
If the parking brake is not applied, the warning
light should come on when the ignition switch is
turned to "ON" or "START", then go out when
the engine starts. If the light comes on at any
other time, you should slow the vehicle and bring
it to a complete stop in a safe location off the
roadway.

The brake fluid level warning light indicates that
the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder
is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be
added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is
found, the car should be immediately and carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.
If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle
should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer
by a professional towing service or some other
safe method.
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal
braking systems. This means you still have
braking on two wheels even if one of the dual
systems should fail. With only one of the dual
systems working, more than normal pedal travel
and greater pedal pressure are required to stop
the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a
distance with only half of the brake system
working. If the brakes fail while you are driving,
shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking
and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

B260J02A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light
The charging system warning light should come
on when the ignition is turned on, then go out
when the engine is running. If the light stays on
while the engine is running, there is a malfunction in the electrical charging system. If the light
comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the
engine and check under the hood. First, make
certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,
check the tension of the belt. Do this as shown
on page 6-21 by pushing down on the center of
the belt. Have the system checked by your
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260B01JM-AAT

Tail Gate Open Warning Light
This light remains on unless the tail gate and/or
tail gate window is completely closed and latched.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46
B260L02HP-GAT

Door ajar warning light and chime
(If Installed)
The door ajar warning light warns you that a door
is not completely closed and the chime warns
you that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :
The warning chime only sounds whenever
the key is in the ignition switch and the
driver's side front door is open simultaneously. The chime sounds until the key is
removed from the ignition switch or the
driver's side front door is closed.

B260N01A-AAT

Malfunction Indicator Light
This light illuminates when there is a malfunction
of an exhaust gas related component, and the
system is not functioning properly so that the
exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.
This light will also illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, and will go out in
a few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, or
does not illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your
nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have
the system checked.

WARNING:

If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/
Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"
or come on while driving, there may be a
problem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake Force
Distribution).
If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have
your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.

B265C01O-AAT
B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The low fuel level warning light comes on when
the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it
comes on, you should add fuel as soon as
possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light
on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the catalytic
converter.

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder
Indicator (If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the
Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will come on
and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI
remains on, comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the key is turned to the "ON"
position, this indicates that there may be a
problem with the ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by
your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The
normal braking system will still be operational,
but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.

Traction Control Indicator
Lights (If installed)
The traction control indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and
whether the system is in operation or not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, but should go out
after three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFF
indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system
checked. See section 2 for more information
about the TCS.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
47

B265C01LZ-AAT

Electronic Stability
Program Indicator Lights
(If installed)
The electronic stability program indicators
change operation according to the ignition switch
position and whether the system is in operation
or not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, but should go out
after three seconds. If the ESP or ESP-OFF
indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system
checked. See section 2 for more information
about the ESP.

B260R01E-GAT

The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated when the cruise control switch is
pushed downward to "SET (COAST)".
The SET indicator light does not illuminate when
the control switch is in the "CANCEL" position.

B260T01O-GAT

4WD System Warning Light
(If installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the
4WD(Four Wheel Drive) system warning light
will come on and then go off in a few seconds.

B260Q01E-GAT

Cruise Indicator Light
(If installed)
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control main
switch on the end of the barrel is pushed.
When the cruise control main switch is pushed
a second time, the cruise control system will be
and the light will turn off.
Information on the use of cruise control may be
found on page 1-79.

B260V01JM-GAT

SET Indicator Light
(If installed)

CAUTION:

If the 4WD system warning light (
) blinks
while driving, this indicates that there is a
malfunction in the 4WD system. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.

4WD Lock Indicator Light
(If installed)
The 4WD (Four Wheel Drive) lock indicator light
in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the
The 4WD lock switch is pushed.
The purpose of this switch is to increase the
drive power when driving on wet pavement,
snow-covered roads and/or off-road.
The 4WD lock indicator light is turned off by
pushing the switch again.

NOTE:
Do not use 4WD on normal dry pavement
conditions.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

48
B270A01O-AAT

B280A01A-AAT

B290A02A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

FUEL GAUGE

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE

The front and rear disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-pitched
squealing or scraping noise when new pads are
needed. The sound may come and go or be
heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. It
may also be heard when the brake pedal is
pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damage
will result if the worn pads are not replaced. See
your Hyundai dealer immediately.

HJM2181

The needle on the gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity
is given in Section 9.

HJM2182

WARNING:

Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could erupt and cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
49

The needle on the engine coolant temperature
gauge should stay in the normal range. If it moves
across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as
soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then
open the hood and, after the engine has cooled,
check the coolant level and the water pump drive
belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, have
your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.

B330A03A-AAT

B300A01A-AAT

TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

B330A01JM

The tachometer registers the speed of your
engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:

The engine should not be raced to such a
speed that the needle enters the red zone
on the tachometer face. This can cause
severe engine damage and may void your
warranty.

B300A01JM

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in
miles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilometers per hour (on the inner scale).

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
TRIP COMPUTER

50
B310B02JM-EAT

B400B02JM-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

(If installed)

Reset
Switch

HJM2185

B310B04JM

A Type

HJM2185

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays
information related to driving, such as a tripmeter,
average fuel consumption and distance to empty
on the LCD.

1. Odometer
The odometer records the total driving distance
in miles and is useful for keeping a record for
maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

B Type

Any alteration of the odometer may void
your warranty coverage.

B310B02JM

2. Trip odometer
This mode indicates the drive distance travelled
since the last reset.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
51

Trip Computer Switch
o The trip computer switch is used to zero the
multi-functional display mode.
o Pushing in the trip computer switch behind
the right side of the steering wheel changes
the display as follows;
TRIPMETER

1. Tripmeter

2. Distance to Empty
A Type

A Type

B Type

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

B400B01JM-A

o This mode indicates the total distance travelled since the last tripmeter reset. Total
distance is also reset to zero if the battery is
disconnected.
o Pressing the trip computer switch for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter is being
displayed, clears the tripmeter to zero.
o The meter's working range is from 0 to 621
miles (999.9kms)

B400B03JM-A

o This mode indicates the estimated distance
to empty with the current fuel in the fuel tank
and distance to empty symbol.
o When refueling with more than 2 gallons (8
liters), the trip computer will recognize refueling. If less fuel is added, the trip computer
may not reset.
o For an accurate distance to empty, drive
more than 62miles after refueling the tank.
o When the distance to empty is less than
31miles, the symbol will come on constantly
and the distance to empty digits will flash
"----" until more fuel is added.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

NOTE:
o The distance to empty can differ from
the actual tripmeter according to driving
condition habits.
o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving
pattern or vehicle speed.

3. Average Fuel Consumption
A Type

B Type

B400B02JM-A

o This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the
distance since the last average consumption reset.
o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel
consumption input.
o For an accurate calculation, drive more than
31 miles.
o The meter's working range is from 0.0 to 99.9
miles per gallon.

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the turn
signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing
upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on
the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is
completed, the lever will automatically return to
the center position and turn off the turn signals
at the same time. If either turn signal indicator
light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but
does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is
a malfunction in the system. Check for a burnedout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
53

B340B01A-AAT

B340C03A-AAT

B340D01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

Headlight Switch

High-beam Switch
To turn on the headlight high beams, push the
lever forward (away from you). The High Beam
Indicator Light will come on at the same time. For
low beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

HJM2084

HJM2089

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to a point where it begins flashing.
The lever will automatically return to the center
position when released.

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the
end of the multi-function switch. The first position turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail
lights and instrument panel lights. The second
position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON" position
to turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off
If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" after
driving, the parking lights will automatically shut
"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.
To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turn
the ignition key to the "ON" position.

HJM2088

To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever
toward you, then release it. The headlights can
be flashed even though the headlight switch is
in the "OFF" position.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH

54
B340G01L-GAT

B350A01JM-AAT

B350B01JM-GAT

Auto Light (If installed)

Windshield Washer Operation

B350A01JM-U
HJM2085

To operate the automatic light feature, turn the
barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If
you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the
tail lights and headlights will be turned automatically on or off according to external illumination.

The windshield wiper switch has three positions:
1. Intermittent wiper operation
2. Low-speed operation
3. High-speed operation

NOTE:
To prevent damage to the wiper system, do
not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow
and ice should be removed manually. If
there is only a light layer of snow or ice,
operate the heater in the defrost mode to
melt the snow or ice before using the wiper
or activate the windshield wiper blade
deicer.(If installed)

HJM2092-U

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/
washer lever toward the steering wheel. When
the washer lever is operated, the wipers automatically make three passes across the windshield. The washer continues to operate until
the lever is released.

NOTE:
o Do not operate the washer more than 15
seconds at a time or when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass
prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in winter,
use windshield washer antifreeze.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
55

Mist Wiper Operation

B350C01O-AAT

B390A01JM-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

Rear Window Wiper And Washer
(If installed)

HJM2093-U
HJM2091-U

If a single wipe is desired in mist, push the
windshield wiper and washer control lever upwards.

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the
wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the
switch in this position, the interval between
wipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18
seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.
It also can be varied by vehicle speeds within
same time.

HJM2096-U

1.
2.OFF
3.INT:

: The rear window wiper starts to operate three times after the washer fluid
sprays onto the rear window.

The interval between wipes operates
every 5 seconds intermittently.
4.ON : The rear window wiper starts to operate continuously.
5.
: The washer fluid will be sprayed onto
the rear window and the wiper operates while the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

56
Do not operate the washer continuously for
more than 15 seconds or when the fluid reservoir is empty; this could damage the system. Do
not operate the wiper when the window is dry;
this can result in scratching as well as premature wiper blade wear.

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B360A04A-AAT

B370A01A-AAT

(If installed)

HJM2098
HJM2097

To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch.
They will light when the headlight switch is in the
second position and the ignition key is in the
"ON" position.

NOTE:
If you turn on the headlight high beams, the
front fog lights will be turned off.

The hazard warning system should be used
whenever you find it necessary to stop the car
in a hazardous location. When you must make
such an emergency stop, always pull off the
road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on by
pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all
turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning
lights will operate even though the key is not in
the ignition.
To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the
switch a second time.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH

1
57

B385A01JM-AAT

B380A01Y-AAT

Windshield wiper Blade De-icer
(If installed)

Rear Window Defroster Switch

CAUTION:

Do not clean the inner side of the rear
window glass with an abrasive type of glass
cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign
deposits from the inner surface of the glass
as this may cause damage to the defroster
elements.

NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON" position
for the rear window defroster to operate.
HJM2104
HJM2101

The windshield wiper blade de-icer is turned on
by pushing in the switch. To turn the de-icer off,
push the switch a second time. The windshield
wiper blade de-icer automatically turns itself off
after about 20 minutes.

The rear window defroster and heated outside
rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the
switch. To turn the defroster off, push the switch
a second time. The rear window defroster
automatically turns itself off after about 15 minutes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the
switch again after it has turned itself off.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58

DIGITAL CLOCK

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B400A01A-AAT

B410A01A-AAT

HJM2137

There are three control buttons for the digital
clock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated.
MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.
RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to
facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time.
When this is done:
Pressing "R" between
changes the readout to
Pressing "R" between
changes the readout to

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

10
11
11
12

: 30 and 11 : 29
: 00.
: 30 and 12 : 29
: 00.

B420A01A-AAT

B410A01JM

The instrument panel lights can be made brighter
or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light
control knob.

B420A01JM

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must
be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way
into its socket. When the element has heated,
the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This
can damage the heating element and create a
fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,
use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its
approved equivalent.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

POWER OUTLETS

DRINK HOLDER

ASHTRAY / COIN TRAY

B500D02JM-GAT

B450A01JM-AAT

B430A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

Front Drink Holder

B430A01JM
HJM2156

These are located in the quarter trim and on the
rear main console.
These supply 12V electric power to operate
electric accessories or equipment only when
the key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

CAUTION:

o Use when the engine is running and remove a plug form the power outlet after
using the electric appliance. Using when
the engine stops or remaining the electric
appliance with plugged in for many hours
may cause the battery to be discharged.
o Do not use the power outlet to connect
electric accessories or equipment other
than those designed to operate on 12 volts.

The front ashtray/coin tray may be opened by
pushing and releasing the ashtray lid. To remove the ashtray to empty or clean it, lift the
ashtray upward and pull it out. The ashtray coin
tray light will only illuminate when the external
lights are on.

HJM2159

The front drink holder is located on the main
console .

WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot
can injure you or your passengers. Spilled
liquids can damage interior trim and
electrical components.
o Do not place objects other than cups or
cans in the drink holder. The objects can
be thrown out in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
SUNROOF

60
B450B01JM-AAT

B460A01Y-AAT

B460B01JM-GAT

REAR DRINK HOLDER
(If installed)

(If installed)
Sun Shade

Opening the Sunroof

HJM2024
HJM2029

HJM2160

The rear drink holders is located in the rear seat
arm rest. The rear drink holder can be used by
pulling the rear seat armrest.

WARNING:

Do not place objects other than cups or
cans in the drink holder. This objects can be
thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sunshade which you can manually adjust to let in
light with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:

Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you
can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof
control buttons located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or
tilted when the ignition switch is in the "ON"
position.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
61

Sliding the sunroof
Auto slide open
To use the autoslide feature, momentarily (more
than 1 second) press the SLIDE OPEN button
on the overhead console. The sunroof will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof sliding at
any point, press any sunroof control button.

B460C01JM-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof
WARNING:

o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,
arms or body are between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash, as this could
result in injury.
o Do not place your head or arms out of the
sunroof opening at any time.

Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.

Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE button
on the overhead console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.

CAUTION:

o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold
temperature or when it is covered with
ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may
have accumulated on the guide rails.
o Do not press any sunroof control button
longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

HJM2025

Auto tilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momentarily (more
than 1 second) press the TILT UP button on the
overhead console. The sunroof will tilt all the
way open. To stop the sunroof tilting at any point,
press any sunroof control button.

Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62

Close
To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE button
on the overhead console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.

B460D03B-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof
If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

NOTE:
After washing the car or after there is rain,
be sure to wipe off any water that is on the
sunroof before operating it.

HJM2027

2. Remove the mounting screws of the front
overhead console with a (+) driver.
HJM2026

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior light
lenses in the front overhead console by
using a flat blade screwdriver.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

INTERIOR LIGHT

HJM2028

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided
with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench
can be found in the vehicle's glove box.
4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or counterclockwise to close the sunroof.

B460E01JM-GAT

B480B01JM-AAT

Resetting the sunroof

Map Light

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected
or discharged, or you use the emergency handle
to operate the sunroof, you have to reset your
sunroof system as follows:

Without Sunroof

1. Turn the ignition key to the ON position.
2. According to the position of the sunroof, do
as follows.
1) In case that the sunroof has closed completely or been tilted : Press the TILT UP
button for 1 second.
2) In case that the sunroof has slide-opened:
Press and hold the CLOSE button for
more than 5 seconds until the sunroof
has closed completely. And then press
the TILT UP button for 1 second
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button once again
until the sunroof has returned to the original
position of TILT UP after it is raised a little
higher than the maximum TILT UP position.
When this is complete, the sunroof system
is reset.

CAUTION:

If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operate
properly.

1
63

With sunroof

HJM2099

Push in the map light switch to turn the light on
or off. This light is convenient as a map light at
night or as a personal light for the driver and the
passenger.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
SPECTACLE CASE

64
B490A01JM-AAT

B491A03O-GAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

(If Installed)

GLOVE BOX

HJM2145
HJM2158

HJM2100

The interior courtesy light has two buttons. The
two buttons are:

o DOOR
In the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesy
light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes
out gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

o ON
In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all
times. Do not leave this button pressed for an
extended period of time when the vehicle is not
running.

The spectacle case is located on the front
overhead console.
Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle
case.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box
release lever.
o The glove box door can be locked (and
unlocked) with the key.

!
WARNING:

Do not keep objects except spectacle inside the spectacle case. Such objects can
be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

WARNING:

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop, the glove box
door should be kept closed when the car is
in motion.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
B500B01O-AAT

B510A01A-AAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Manual Type

Opening the glove box will automatically turn on
the light when the multi-function switch is turned
to the first/second position.

CAUTION:

If the mirror control is jammed with ice, do
not attempt to break it free using the control
handle or by manipulating the face of the
mirror. Use an approved spray de-icer (not
radiator antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.

B510A01JM

The outside rearview mirrors are equipped with
a remote control for your convenience. It is
operated by the control lever in the bottom front
corner of the window.
Before driving away, always check that your
mirrors are positioned so you can see behind
you, both to the left and right sides, as well as
directly behind your vehicle. When using the
mirror, always exercise caution when attempting to judge the distance of vehicles behind or
along side of you.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
66
B510B01Y-AAT

B510D01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If installed)

CAUTION:

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER
(If installed)

o Do not operate the switch continuously
for an unnecessary length of time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face could
cause permanent damage. To remove
any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or
approved de-icer.

!
HJM2073

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
to your preferred rear vision, both directly behind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and
right sides.
The remote control outside rearview mirror
switch controls the adjustments for both right
and left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:
1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left
to activate the adjustable mechanism for the
corresponding door mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appropriate perimeter switch as illustrated.

WARNING:

Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger
side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror
with a curved surface. Any objects seen in
this mirror are closer than they appear.

HJM2104

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated
in connection with the rear window defroster. To
heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in
the switch for the rear window defroster. The
rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear
vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the
switch again to turn the heater off. The outside
rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself
off after 15 minutes.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR

B510C01A-AAT

B520A01A-AAT

B520C02JM-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEW
MIRRORS

Manual Type

AUTOMATIC DIMMING REAR VIEW
MIRROR WITH COMPASS
(If installed)

HJM2070
B510C01JM

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them
toward the rear.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded
rearward for parking in narrow areas.

WARNING:

Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview
mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause serious injury or
death.

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside
rearview mirror. The "night" position is selected
by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of
headlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HJM2072

The automatic dimming rear view mirror automatically controls the glare of headlights of the
car behind you when turned on by pushing the
"MIRROR" button.
It is turned off by pushing the button once more.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68

3.Calibration procedure
CAUTION:

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel
or similar material dampened with glass
cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

1.To operate the compass feature
The compass is a convenient feature which
displays the compass heading of the vehicle.

If the display is "C", calibrate the compass.
-

Drive the vehicle in a circle in a safe, open
area at less than 5miles/h 3 times or until the
compass heading appears.
Driving in a circle in a right-handed direction
and opposite direction are possible, and if the
calibration is completed, the compass heading will appear.
Keep driving in a circle until a compass
heading appears.

4.Setting the compass zone
2."COMP" switch
Push the "COMP" switch on the lower part of the
mirror, then the vehicle's directional heading will
be displayed. Pushing the "COMP" switch again
will turn off the display.

1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map.

Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East

B520C06JM

2. Press the "COMP" button for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
3. Press the "COMP" button until the new zone
number appears in the display. After you
stop pressing the button, the display will
show a compass direction within a few seconds.

CAUTION:

1. Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.
attached to the vehicle by means of a
magnet. They affect the operation of the
compass.
2. If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an
authorized dealer.
3. The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct
compass point when the vehicle moves
to an area where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

PARKING BRAKE

TAIL GATE

B530A01A-AAT

69
B540B01JM-AAT

B540A01JM-AAT

Tail gate Window

HJM3026

Always engage the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. This also turns on the parking
brake indicator light when the key is in the "ON"
or "START" position. Before driving away, be
sure that the parking brake is fully released and
the indicator light is off.
o To engage the parking brake, pull the lever
up as far as possible.
o To release the parking brake, pull up and
press the thumb button. Then, while holding
the button in, lower the brake lever.

(1)

HJM2012

o Pull and raise the "DOOR" release lever to
open the tail gate.
o To close, lower the door, then press down on
it until it locks. To be sure the door is securely
fastened, try to pull it up again.

WARNING:

The tail gate should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion.
If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust
gases may enter the car resulting in serious
illness or death to the occupants. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases
on page 2-2.

(2)
HJM2013

o Pull the "GLASS" release lever (1) to open
the tailgate window glass, and raise the
window open lever (2).
o To close the tail gate window, lower the tail
gate window, and it will close by itself.
To be sure the tail gate window is securely
fastened, try to pull it up again.

NOTE:
The tail gate window lock is operated in
connection with the tail gate lock. To open
the tail gate window make sure the tailgate
is unlocked with a key or the central door
locking switch.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT

70
Shopping bag holders are located in the front
console and on the backside of the rear seat.
When not in use, return it to the original position.

B540A01JM-AAT

SHOPPING BAG HOLDERS

B540C01JM-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

CAUTION:

o Do not hang a bag beyond 6 Ibs (3 kg).
It may cause damage to the shopping
bag holder.
o Return it to the original position after
using the shopping bag holder.

HJM2150

HHR2070

Luggage compartment light has a 3-position
switch. The three positions are:
o In the "DOOR" position, the luggage compartment light comes on when the tail gate is
opened, then goes out when it is closed.
o In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all
times.
o In the "OFF" position, the light stays off at all
times.

HJM2151

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HOW TO USE LUGGAGE ROOM

B650A02JM-GAT

Cargo Area Cover (If installed)

!
B650A01S-AAT

Stowage Precautions

HJM2165

B640A01JM

Nothing should be carried on top of the luggage
cover. Loose materials could result in injury to
vehicle occupants during sudden braking.
Before using the luggage under tray, hang the
cargo area cover hook to the weather strip.

Place the cargo area cover hook in the stowed
position while not in use.

1. Do not place objects on the cargo security
screen. Such objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle
occupants during an accident or when braking.
2. For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
3. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
compartment. It is designed for luggage
only.
4. Try to maintain the balance of the vehicle and
locate the weight as far forward as possible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72
B545B02JM-GAT

Luggage Under Tray

HJM2167

HJM2166

There is a multipurpose tray under the luggage
mat.

Before using the luggage under tray, remove
the luggage mat. Turn the lever toward "UNLOCK".

HJM2168

Raise the luggage under tray cover with the grip.
After using it lock the luggage under tray cover
by turning the lever toward "LOCK".

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
73

B655A01JM-GAT

Luggage Side Trim

Covering shelf screen (If Installed)

B655A02JM
HJM2163
B655A01JM

There are small article trays in the luggage side
trim.

Covering shelf screen veils the luggage room to
hang the screen hook to a headrest pole.

While not in use, place the screen hook to the
hook holder.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
ROOF RACK

74
B540D03HP-GAT

B630A01JM-AAT

Luggage Net (If Installed)

(If installed)
CAUTION:

To prevent damage to the goods or the
vehicle, care should be taken when carrying
fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

!
B540D01JM

Some objects can be kept in the net in the
luggage compartment.
Use the luggage net on the floor or at the back
of the luggage compartment to prevent objects
from sliding.

WARNING:

Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of its path.
DO NOT use when the luggage net straps
have visible signs of wear or damage.

HJM2162

If your Hyundai has a roof rack, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails and
fixing components to adapt the roof rack on your
vehicle may be obtained from an authorized
Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:

o In case a sunroof is installed, do not
position roof rack loads that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
o The following specifications are recommended when loading cargo or luggage.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT
B550A01A-AAT

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE
B560A02JM-AAT

CAUTION:

ROOF RACK

165 lbs (75 kg) Evenly
Distributed

o Loading cargo or luggage above 165 lbs
(75 kg) on the roof rack may damage your
vehicle.
When you carry large objects, never let
them hang over the rear or the sides of
your vehicle.
o To prevent damage or loss of cargo as
you are driving, check frequently to make
sure the luggage carrier and cargo are
still securely fastened.
o Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
o To use the roof rails as a roof rack, you
must fit the roof rails with two or more
crossrails or equivalent before carrying
cargo or luggage on the roof.
o Loading cargo or luggage exceeding the
specification on the roof rack may reduce the stability of your vehicle.
o Do not allow cargo loads to rest directly
on the roof of your article; cross rails
must be used.

B550A01JM

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights
on either side of the car, the high mounted rear
stoplight in the center of the rear window also
lights when the brakes are applied.

HJM2018

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the
vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener
located on the front floor area on the left side of
the vehicle.

NOTE:
If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice
has formed around it, tap lightly or push on
the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do
not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do
not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to
melt.

1
75

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76

B560A01JM

WARNING:

o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap
clicks, otherwise "
" light will illuminate.
o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before
refueling, always stop the engine and
never allow sparks or open flames near
the filler area. If you need to replace the
filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part.

WARNING:

o If you open the fuel filler cap during high
ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern.
Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,
turn it slowly.
o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replaced
and securely seated after fueling. Failure
to replace or fully seat the fuel filler cap
will result in fuel vapors escaping into
the atmosphere and the check engine
"MIL" indicator illuminating.
o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle
shut off when refueling.
o Automotive fuels are flammable/explosive materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully.
o Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel
filler cap, have one's hands in contact
with metal parts away from the filler neck
to discharge static electricity.
o Do not get back in the vehicle while
refueling. Do not operate anything that
can produce static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors
resulting in explosion.

WARNING:

o When using a portable fuel container be
sure to place the container on the ground
while refueling. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. While starting refueling contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
o Do not use cellular phones around a gas
station. The electric current or electronic
interference from cellular phones can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
o When refueling always shut the engine
off. Sparks by electrical equipment of
the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. After refueling, check to make
sure the fuel filler cap is securely closed,
and then start the engine.
o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes
around a gas station. Automotive fuels
are flammable.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HOOD RELEASE

1
77

2. Push the secondary latch lever to the left and
lift the hood.

B570A03A-GAT

Before closing the hood, return the support rod
to its clip to prevent it from rattling. Lower the
hood until it is about 1 ft. (30 cm) above the
closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it
locks into place.

CAUTION:

Make sure that the support rod has been
released prior to closing the hood.

HJM2020

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HJM2022

3. Hold the hood open with the support rod.

HJM2021
HJM2023

WARNING:

o Always double check to be sure that the
hood is firmly latched before driving
away. If it is not latched, the hood could
open while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
o The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided in the
hood whenever you inspect the engine
compartment. This will prevent the hood
from falling and possibly injuring you.
o Do not move the vehicle with the hood
in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be
damaged.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78

FLOOR MAT ANCHOR

SUN VISOR

B571A03Y-AAT

B580A01L-AAT

B585BA01JM-AAT

SUN VISOR EXTENDER

B570A01JM-A

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,
make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor in
your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.

WARNING:

o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed
on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slips
and interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
o Don't put an additional floor mat on the
top of the anchored floor mat, otherwise
the additional mat may slide forward and
interfere with the movement of the pedals.

B580A01JM

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give
the driver and front passenger either frontal or
sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out
direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sun
visor for the driver and front passenger.

NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
label containing useful information can be
found on the back of each sun visor.

WARNING:

Do not place the sun visor in such a manner
that it obscures visibility of the roadway,
traffic or other objects.

HJM2142-1

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extenders that may be used when the visor is in the side
glass position.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER
B580C01LZ-AAT

B600A01A-AAT

FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING
LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT

TICKET HOLDER

HJM2067
HJM2142

The ticket holder is provided on the front of the
sun visor for holding a tollgate ticket.

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:
1. Push the lever downward to unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the lever
by pulling it upward.

WARNING:

Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel
while driving as this may result in loss of
control of the vehicle which may cause
serious injury or death.

B620A01JM

A red light comes on when the front door is
opened. The purpose of this light is to assist
when you get in or out and also to warn passing
vehicles.

1
79

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80

HORN

REAR SEAT ARM REST

B610A01L-GAT

CRUISE CONTROL

B611A01Y-AAT

B660A01S-AAT

(If installed)

B610A01JM

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the
horn.

HJM2043

This arm rest is located in the center of the rear
seat back.

Main Switch
B660A01JM

The cruise control system provides automatic
speed control for your comfort when driving on
freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested
highways. This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
81

5. To momently increase speed, depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to
exceed the preset speed. When you remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal, the
vehicle will return to the speed you have set.

B660B02E-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

B660C04E-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

WARNING:

To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the cruise control main switch
off when not using the cruise control.

B660B01JM

1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the
end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. This turns the system on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Push the cruise control switch downward to
"SET (COAST)" and release it. If the "SET"
(COAST)" switch is selected the "CRUISE"
and "SET"(COAST) indicator light in the
instrument cluster will be illuminated simultaneously.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal
and the desired speed will automatically be
maintained.

B660C01JM

To disengage the cruise control system, pull the
control switch toward the steering wheel to the
"CANCEL" position.Additionally, the following
actions will disengage the system:
o Depress the brake pedal.
o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).
o Shift the selector lever to "P" or "N" position
(Automatic transaxle).
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25
mph (40 km/h).
o Release the main switch.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82
B660D01E-AAT

B660F02E-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

To Reset at a Slower Speed

B660D01JM

The vehicle will automatically resume the speed
set prior to cancellation when you push the
control switch upward to the "RESUME
(ACCEL)" position and release it, providing the
vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660E01E-AAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed
1. Push the control switch upward to the "RESUME (ACCEL)" position and hold it.
2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the
control switch. While the control switch is
held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.

B660B01JM

1. Push the control switch downward to "SET
(COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decelerate.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, release
the control switch. While the control switch
is pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually
decrease.

WARNING:

o Keep the main switch off when not using
the cruise control.
o Use the cruise control system only when
traveling on open highways in good
weather.
o Do not use the cruise control when it
may not be safe to keep the car at a
constant speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding
roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
o Pay particular attention to the driving
conditions whenever using the cruise
control system.
o During cruise-control driving with a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift
into neutral without depressing the
clutch pedal, or the engine will be
overrevved. If this happens, depress the
clutch pedal or release the main switch.
o With the cruise control engaged, when
the brake pedal is applied, it is normal to
hear the cruise control system deactivate. This is an indication of normal
system operation.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
83

o During normal cruise control operation,
when the "SET(COAST)" is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01JM-GAT

B710B02O-AAT

CENTER VENTILATOR
The center ventilators are located in the middle
of the dashboard. To change the direction of the
air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are
opened when the vent knob is moved to "
"
position. The vents are closed when the vent
knob is moved to "
". Keep these vents clear
of any obstructions.

B710C02HP-AAT

SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on each side of
the dash board. To change the direction of the
air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent
up-and-down and side-to-side. The vents are
closed when the vent knob is moved to "
"
position. The vents are opened when the vent
knob is moved to "
". Keep these vents clear
of any obstructions.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Side Defroster Nozzle
Side Ventilators
Windshield Defroster Nozzles
Center Ventilators

B710A02JM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01JM-AAT

B670B01A-AAT

B670C02E-AAT

Fan Speed Control
(Blower Control)

Air Intake Control

HJM2109A

There are three controls and two switches for
the heating and cooling system. They are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Air flow control
Fan speed control
Temperature control
Air intake control switch
Air conditioning switch

HJM2118A
HJM2116A

This is used to turn the blower fan on and off and
to select the fan speed.
The blower fan speed, and therefore the volume
of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control
between the "1" and "4" position.

This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculating inside air.
To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh
mode, Recirculation mode) push the control
button.
FRESH MODE (
) : The indicator light on
the button goes off when the air intake control
is fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE (
): The indicator
light on the button is illuminated when the air
intake control is recirculation mode.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the
vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function selected.

B670D01JM-GAT

Air Flow Control

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from
within the passenger compartment will be drawn
through the heating system and heated or
cooled according to the function selected.

NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating in "Recirculation"
mode (
) may result in fogging of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged
use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode (
) selected may
result in the air within the passenger
compartment becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"
the air intake control will change to
"Fresh" mode (
) in floor, floor-defrost
and defrost position. This is normal operation.

HJM2111

HJM2110A

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and to
direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the
floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,
Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of
the vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used to
turn the blower fan off.

Face-Level
Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be
discharged through the side and center ventilators.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
87

HJM2114

Bi-Level
Air is discharged through the face vents and the
floor vents.

HJM2112

HJM2113

Floor-Level
Air is discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle
and side ventilator.

Floor-Defrost Level
Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster
nozzle and side ventilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C
will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88

NOTE:
o The air intake control switch will change
to "
" mode when the ignition switch
is turned "ON" with the MAX A/C mode
selected.
o When you change to another mode from
MAX A/C, the A/C and the air intake
control switch are set to the following
chart.
Air Intake
A/C
Control Switch
B670C02JM

HJM2115

Defrost-Level
Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.
If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will be
turned turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode
will be activated to improve windshield defrosting.

MAX
A/C

ON
or

MAX A/C-Level

ON or OFF *

Air is discharged through the face level vents.
If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C will
turn on automatically and "Recirculation" mode
will be activated.

OFF

OFF
ON or OFF *
ON
ON

The A/C or the air intake control switch
returns to its former setting.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A01E-AAT

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

B670C03JM

Cool

OFF

Off-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.

NOTE:
If the air flow control is off, the air intake
control is set to the fresh mode automatically.

Warm

B690A01JM-A
HJM2117

This control is used to adjust the degree of
heating or cooling desired.

For normal heating operation, set the air intake
control to the fresh air (
) position and the
air flow control to the floor (
) position.
For faster heating, the air intake control should
be set in the recirculate (
) position.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow control to
the defrost (
) position. (The A/C will be on
automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
For maximum heat, rotate the temperature
control to "Warm".

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90

BI-LEVEL HEATING

VENTILATION

B700A02E-AAT

B730A01L-AAT

B710A01S-AAT

Operation Tips

B710A01JM-A

B700A01JM-A

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heating
controls. To use this feature:
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air
(
) position.
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level (
)
position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired
speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"
and "Warm".

To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode
(
).
o To direct all intake air to the dashboard
vents, set the airflow control to "Face" ( ).
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired
speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"
and "Warm".

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to
(
).
Be sure to return the control to (
) when
the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in
the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert
and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn
in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are
not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other
obstructions.
o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set
the air intake control to the fresh air (
)
position, fan speed to the desired position,
turn on the air conditioning system, and
adjust temperature control to desired temperature.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
91

B720A01JM-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
A Type

B Type

A Type

B Type

B720B02JM

B720B01JM

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:
To remove interior fog on the windshield:
o Set the air flow control to the defrost (
) position.
(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.
o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield:
o Set the air flow control to the defrost (
) position.
(The A/C will be turned on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to the warm.
o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
o Activate windshield wiper blade de-icer (If installed)

NOTE:
When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause
fog to form on the exterior windshield because of the temperature difference. At this time set the air flow
control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
B740B01S-AAT
B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Operation for
Cooling

Air Conditioning Switch
(If installed)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
For greater cooling, turn the fan control to
one of the higher speeds or temporarily
select the "Recirculation (
)" position on
the air intake control.

B740C01S-AAT

Dehumidified Heating
For dehumidified heating:

B740B01JM-A
HJM2119

The air conditioning is turned on or off by
pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel.

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:
o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut off
outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing the switch. The air conditioning indicator
light should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode
(
).
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"
provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".)

o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should come on at
the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the "Fresh" mode
(
).
o Set the air flow control to the "Face" ( ).
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of
the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to provide the
desired amount of warmth.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
93

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when you first
get in, open the windows for a few minutes
to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air conditioning
system, keep all windows closed to keep hot
air out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift
to a lower gear. This increases engine speed,
which in turn increases the speed of the air
conditioning compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning off
to avoid the possibility of the engine overheating.
o During winter months or in periods when the
air conditioning is not used regularly, run the
air conditioning once every month for a few
minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94

AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT

(If installed)

TYPE A (Without A.Q.S: Air Quality System)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic
heating and cooling control system controlled
by simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01JM-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls
B970B01JM

1. Temperature Control Switch
2. Air Flow Control Switch
3. Display Window
4. Defroster Switch
5. Blower Fan Control Switch
6. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch
7. OFF Switch
8. Air Conditioning Switch
9. Air lntake Control Switch
10.Air Quality System Switch
(If installed)

TYPE B (With A.Q.S: Air Quality System)

B970B02JM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
95

NOTE:

B970C01JM-AAT

Automatic Operation

HJM2126

HJM2124

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls heating and
cooling by doing as follows:
1. Push the "AUTO" button. The indicator light
will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor
and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower
speed and air conditioner will be controlled
automatically.

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired
temperature.
The temperature will increase to the maximum 90°F(32°C) by pushing the " " button.
Each push of the button will cause the temperature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C).
The temperature will decrease to the minimum 62°F(17°C) by pushing the " " button.
Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).

o If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode will
reset to Centigrade degrees.
This is a normal condition and you can
change the temperature mode from Centigrade to Farenheit as follows;
Press the "TEMP" down button and
"AUTO" button simultaneously for 3
secs. The display shows that the unit of
temperature is adjusted to Centigrade or
Fahrenheit.
→°F or °F→
→°C)
(°C→
o Never place anything covering the sensor which is located on the instrument
panel to ensure better control of the
heating and cooling system.
Photo sensor

HJM2086

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96
B980A01Y-AAT

B980B01Y-AAT

B670C02Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan Speed Control Switch

Air Intake Control Switch
(Without A.Q.S)

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons
other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the
system sequentially works according to the
order of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically.
Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to
automatic control of the system.

HJM2123

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed
by pressing the appropriate fan speed control
button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off
the fan.

B670C01JM

This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculation inside air.
To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh
mode, Recirculation mode) push the control
button.
FRESH MODE (
) : The indicator light on the
button goes on when the air intake control is
fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE (
) : The indicator
light on the button is illuminated when the air
intake control is recirculation mode.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
97

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the
vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function selected.

B980C01JM-GAT

Recirculation Mode :

Air Intake Control Switch
(With A.Q.S) (If installed)

Air from within the passenger compartment will
be drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, and air
from within the passenger compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust Gas Cutoff Mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode (
)
is automatically converted to the (
) mode,
to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged
use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in
the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"
the air intake control will change to "
"
mode (regardless of switch position).
This is normal operation. The air intake
control operates in "AUTO" mode when
turning the ignition to the ON position if
the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine.

NOTE:
B980C01JM

This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculate inside air automatically.
:
:

OFF
ON
Fresh Mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is
heated or cooled according to the function
selected.

o It should be noted that prolonged operation of the heating system in recirculation mode (
) will give rise to misting
of the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with
the recirculation mode (
) selected
may result in the air within the passenger
compartment becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"
the air intake control will change to (
)
mode except for the case you turned
"OFF" the ignition switch in A.Q.S mode
(
) beforehand. This is normal
operation. The air intake control is oper-

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98
ated in "AUTO" mode when turning the
ignition to the "ON" position if the
"AUTO" mode was used before shutting
off the engine.

B980E01E-GAT

Air Flow Control

CAUTION:

If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air
intake control to the Fresh air position or
A.Q.S control to "OFF".
HJM2111

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off
Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of
the heating and cooling system.

HJM2128

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be
directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or
windshield. Four symbols are used to represent
Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air
position.

Face-Level
When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicator
light will come on, causing air to be discharged
through the face level vents.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1
99

HJM2114

Bi-Level
When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor
vents.

HJM2112

HJM2113

Floor-Level
When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, the
indicator light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the floor vents, windshield
defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator.

Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, the
indicator light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the windshield defrost vents,
the floor vents and side defroster nozzle and
side ventilator .

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
(IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)

100
B980F01JM-GAT

B760A03E-AAT

Defrost Switch

(If installed)

Inside air
Outside air

Inside air

Filter

Blower fan
Evaporator core

B980F01JM

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the (
)
mode will be automatically selected and the air
will be discharged through the windshield defrost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and side
ventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is
higher than 2°C, and automatically turns off if the
ambient temperature drops below 2°C.

Heater core

CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 12,500 miles
(20,000 km) or once a year. If the car is
being driven in severe conditions such
as dusty, rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
o When the air flow rate is decreased, it
must be checked by an authorized dealer.

B760A01E

The air conditioner filter is located in front of the
blower unit behind the glove box.
It operates to decrease the amount of pollutants
entering the car.
To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to the
page 6-18.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

101

B750A02A-AAT

AM reception

How Car Audio Works

Ionosphere

FM reception

FM radio station
Mountains

Ionosphere

Unobstructed
area

Buildings

B750A02L

B750A01L

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from
transmitter towers located around your city.
They are intercepted by the radio antenna on
your car. This signal is then received by the
radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached your
vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio
system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be strong and
clear. This can be due to factors such as the
distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of
buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.

AM broadcasts can be received at greater
distances than FM broadcasts. This is because
AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves
can follow the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstructions so that
they can provide better signal coverage.

Obstructed area

Iron bridges
B750A03L

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's
surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the
station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by
buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a problem exists
with your radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
102
B750B03Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is
wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,
use the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.

!
B750A04L

o Fading - As your car moves away from the
radio station, the signal will weaken and
sound will begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another stronger
station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large
obstructions between the transmitter and
your radio can disturb the signal causing
static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this effect until the
disturbance clears.

B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the
same frequency may begin to play. This is
because your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs, select
another station with a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being
received from several directions can cause
distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from the same
station, or by signals from two stations with
close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has passed.

WARNING:

Don't use a cellular phone when you are
driving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellular
phone.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103
K260A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (K260) (If installed)

4. MODE Select
Batton

5. BAND Selector

6. SCAN Button

3. PRESET Button
2. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
1. POWER ON-OFF/ VOLUME /MODE Control Knob

K260A01JM

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104
K260B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the ignition
key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the
knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows
the radio frequency in the radio mode or the CD
track indicator in the CD mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.

SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel
Selection)

VOLUME Control

Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec or more.
Releasing it will automatically tune to the next
available station with a beep sound.
When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1
second, releasing will automatically tune to the
next higher frequency and when the ( ) side is
pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will
automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the
volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to
reduce the volume.

3. PRESET STATION SELECT
Button

MODE Control

Six (6) stations for AM, FM1 or FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory
circuit on this unit.

After pressing the MODE select button, rotate
the knob clockwise or counter- clockwise for
the desired tone quality.

2. TUNE (Manual) Select Button
Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to
decrease the frequency. Press either button
and hold down to continuously scroll. Release
button once the desired station is reached.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by
simply pressing the band select button and/or
one of the six station select buttons, you may
recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,
FM1 or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by
seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button
you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than
two seconds. A select button indicator will
show in the display indicating which select
button you have depressed. The frequency
display will flash after it has been stored into
the memory.
You should then release the button, and
proceed to program the next desired station.
A total of 18 stations can be programmed by
selecting one AM and two FM stations per
button.
o When completed, any preset station may be
recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band
and the appropriate station button.

4.MODE Select Button
Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the volume control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

BASS Control
To increase the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the bass, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control
Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control)
Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenuated).

BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound. (Left speaker sound will be
attenuated) When the control knob is turned
counter clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (Right speaker sound will be attenuated).

CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106
K260C01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (K260) (If installed)
6. EJECT Button

1. Playing CD
5. SCAN Button

4. REPEAT Button
3. FF/REW Button
2. TRACK UP/DOWN

K260B01JM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107
B260D02O-AAT

4. REPEAT Button

1. Playing CD
o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during
radio operation.
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press
the play button, the CD player will begin
playing even if the radio is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignition
switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN
o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track
number.
o Press once to skip forward to the beginning
of the next track. Press
once to skip back to the beginning of the
track.

3. FF/REW (

)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through
the compact disc track, push and hold the FF
(
) or REW (
) button. When you release
the button, the compact disc player will resume
playing.

o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,
press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push
the button again.

5. SCAN Button
o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
when you have reached the desired track.

6. EJECT Button
When the EJECT button
is pressed with
a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
NOTE:
o If the CD does not operate properly or if
the ER2 fault code is displayed, use one
of two methods to reset the CD deck
function.
- Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.
Then, reinstall the audio fuse.
- Diconnect the negative terminal of the
battery and wait 5 minutes. Then reconnect the negative battery terminal.

o To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating
system.
o When replacing the fuse, replace it with
a fuse having the correct capacity.
o The preset station frequencies are all
erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be
set again if this should occur.
o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.
Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other
metallic objects away from the tape
mechanism and head.
o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with
negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do
not attempt to disassemble or adjust
any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive
moisture.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to the
unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit may
occur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving on the off-roads or other vibrations may skip your compact disc.
Do not use the audio system on offroads as the discs could be scratched
and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into
the unit by the self loading mechanism.
These can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or trouble in the compact disc
player.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable as the player could not be
operated in recording way of the CD
maker. When using the compact disc
player, genuine CDs are recommended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109
HMP280A01TB-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M280) (If installed)
5. Best Station Memory Button (BSM)

7. Equalizer Button (EQ)
4. SCAN Button

3. TUNE/SEEK Select
Knob (JOY STICK)

6. PRESET Buttons
2. BAND Selector
8. Adjustment Mode Select Button (A.MODE)
1. POWER ON-OFF VOLUME Control Knob

M280A01JM

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110
HMP280B01TB-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF Control
o The radio unit may be operated when the
ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
Press the button to switch the power on. The
display shows the radio frequency in the
radio mode, the tape direction indicator in the
tape mode or CDˆMP3 track in either the
CDˆMP3 mode or CD AUTO CHANGER
mode. To switch the power off, press the
button again.
o Push the FMˆAM, TAPE or CDˆMP3 to turn
on that function without pushing Power
ONˆOFF control knob.

VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the
volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to
reduce the volume.

3. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob

4. SCAN

Push the TUNE select knob (JOY STICK)
upwards or downwards to increase or decrease the frequency. Release the knob when
the station is selected.

When the scan button is pressed, the frequency
will increase and the receivable stations will be
tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the
scan button again.

SEEK Operation
(Automatic Channel Selection)

5. Best Station Memory (BSM)

Push the TUNE select knob (JOY STICK) to the
right or left, the frequency will be automatically
tuned to the next higher or lower available
station.

When the BSM button is pressed the six channels from the highest field intensity are selected
next and stored in memory. The stations selected are stored in the sequence frequency
from the first preset key.

WARNING:

Don't operate the button and joy stick switch
while driving. It can cause death or serious
injury in case of an accident.

6. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory
circuit.

2. BAND Selector

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Pressing the band selector FMˆAM changes
the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on the display.

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by
simply pressing the band select button and/or
one of the six station select buttons, you may
recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111
o Press band selector to set the band for AM,
FM and FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by
seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button
you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than
two seconds. Beep sound will be heard while
depressig the button. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the
next desired station. A total of 18 stations can
be programmed by selecting one AM and
two FM station per button.
o When completed, any preset station may be
recalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 band
and the appropriate station button.

7. EQUALIZER (EQ)
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

8. Adjustment Mode select Button
(A.MODE).
Pressing the A.MODE button changes the
BASS, BALANCE, TREBLE and FADER mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the volume control knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

BASS Control
To increase the bass, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the bass, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control
Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112
HMP280C01TB-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (M280) (If installed)

5. Equalizer (EQ)

6. DOLBY Button

7. TAPE EJECT Button

1. FF/REW Button (

)

4. REPEAT Button
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button
M280C01JM

2. AUTO MUSIC Select Button (

)

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113
H290D01O-GAT

1. FF/REW
o Fast forward tape winding starts when the
FF (
) button is pressed during PLAY or
REW mode.
o Tape PLAY starts when the FF (
) button
is pressed again during FF mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW (
)
button is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.
o Tape PLAY starts when the REW ( ) button
pressed again during REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC Select
Press the button to find the starting point of each
song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet
space between songs (must have at least 4
sec. gap) can be accepted by the AUTO MUSIC
Select button.
o Pressing the
button will play the beginning
of the next music segment.
o Pressing the
button will start replay at
the beginning of the music just listened to.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

6. DOLBY

o This allows you to play the reverse side of the
tape by merely depressing the program
button. An arrow will appear in the display to
show tape direction.
o Push the TAPE button to turn on that function
without pushing power ONˆOFF control knob.

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,
you can reduce this considerably by merely
pressing the DOLBY button. If you want to
cancel the DOLBY feature, press the button
again.

7. TAPE EJECT
4. REPEAT
o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push
the button again.

5. Equalizer (EQ)
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

o When the button is pressed with a cassette
loaded, the cassette will eject.
o When the
button is pressed during FF/
REW mode, the cassette will eject.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114
o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with
negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do
not attempt to disassemble or adjust
any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or
excessive moisture.

CAUTION:

o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit may
occur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

115
HMP280E01TB-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (COMPATIBLE WITH MP3/WMA/AAC) (M280) (If installed)

11.CD INDICATOR

7. CD EJECT Button

6. EQUALIZER Button

8. SCAN Button

9. BOOKMARK Button

10.JOY STICK

2. FF/REW Button (

)

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button
4. REPEAT Button
3. Track UP/DOWN Button (
5. RANDOM Button

)
M280E01JM

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116
H290F02O-GAT

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button
o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.
o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during
radio operation or cassette tape playing.
o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press
the CD button the CD player will begin playing
even if the radio or cassette player is being
used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignition
switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
o Push the CD˜MP3 button to turn on that
function without pushing Power ON-OFF
control knob.

NOTE:
o Do not stick paper or tape etc., auto the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
o The unit cannot play a CD-R(Recordable
CD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that is
not finalized. Please refer to the manual
of CD-R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-RW
software for more information on finalization process.
o Depending on the recording status,
some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be played
on this unit.

2. FF/REW (

)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through
the compact disc track, push and hold the FF
(
) or REW (
) button.
When you release the button, the compact disc
player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN
o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track
number.
o Press
button once to skip forward to
the beginning of the next track. Press
button once to skip back to the beginning of
the track.

4. REPEAT (RPT)
o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press it again.
o To repeat the music within selected folder,
press the RPT button for more than 2 seconds. To cancel, press it again. (MP3 CD
only)
o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push
the button again.

5. RANDOM (RDM)
o Press the RDM button to listen the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Press
it again to cancel random play.
o To listen the music within the selected folder
in random order, press the RDM button for
more than 2 seconds. To cancel press it
again. (MP3 CD only)

6. EQUALIZER (EQ)
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

7. CD EJECT
When the button is pressed with a CD loaded,
the CD will eject.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

8. SCAN

10. JOY STICK (ENT)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track.
o To playback the first 10 seconds of each
track in the selected folder, press the SCAN
button for 2 seconds or longer. (MP3 CD
only)
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
When you have reached the desired track.

o You can skip the track by pushing the JOY
STICK to the left or right.
After selecting the desired track, press the
JOY STICK to playback the track.
If you do not press the JOY STICK within 5
seconds, the previous track will playback
again.
o You can move through the folder by pushing
the JOYSTICK to up and down.
After moving the desired folder, press the
JOYSTICK to playback the selected track.
If you do not press the JOYSTICK within 5
seconds, the previous track will playback
again. (MP3 CD only)

9. BOOKMARK (MARK)
When the CD player unit is operating, the desired track on the disc can be bookmarked by
using the MARK button.
o Press the MARK button to bookmark the
desired track for more than 2 seconds.
This will display the "√ " symbol on the LCD
with beep sound.
To play the bookmarked tracks, press the
MARK button within a second.
o Press the MARK button to erase the
bookmarked tracks for more than 2 seconds.
This will erase the bookmark and "√" symbol
on the LCD with beep sound.

o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with
negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do
not attempt to disassemble or adjust
any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or
excessive moisture.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to the
unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit may
occur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving off-road or other vibrations may
skip your compact disc.
Do not use the audio system off-road as
the discs could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into
the unit by the self loading mechanism.
These can cause poor disc scratching to
occur or trouble in the compact disc
player.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation.
When using the compact disc player,
genuine CDs are recommended.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119
HMP280G01JM-GAT

CD CHANGER OPERATION (M280) (If Installed)

8. Equalizer (EQ)

7. SCAN Button

1,4. Disc select Knob
(JOY STICK) (ENT)

2. FF/REW Button (

)

5. REPEAT Button
3. Track UP/DOWN Button (
6. RANDOM Button

)
M280G01JM

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120
B290H02JM-GAT

4. JOYSTICK

8. EQUALIZER (EQ)

To select the CD you want push the DISC select
knob (JOY STICK) to up and down. After selecting the desired CD, push the change the disc
number.

You can skip the track by pushing the JOY
STICK to the left or right.
After selecting the desired track, press the JOY
STICK to playback the track.
If you do not press the JOY STICK within 5
seconds, the previous track will playback again.

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;

2. FF/REW (

5. REPEAT(RPT)

1. DISC Select Knob
(JOY STICK)

)

If you want to fast forward or reverse through
the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF
(
) or REW (
) button.
When you release the button, the compact disc
player will resume playing.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN
o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track
number.
o Press
once to skip forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press once to
skip back to the beginning of the track.

o To repeat the track you are listening to,
press the RPT button. To cancel, press
again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push
the button again.

6. RANDOM (RDM)
Press the RDM button to listen the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. Press it
again to cancel random play.

7. SCAN
o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
for the desired track.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:
o When replacing the fuse, replace it with
a fuse having the correct capacity.
o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with
negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do
not attempt to disassemble or adjust
any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

121

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD changer as damage to
the unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the
changer slot as damage to the unit may
occur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving off-road or other vibrations may
skip your compact disc.
Do not use the audio system off-road as
the discs could be scratched and damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into
the unit by the self loading mechanism.
These can cause disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc
changer.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation.
When using the compact disc changer,
genuine CDs are recommended.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122
B890A01TB-GAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE (M280 only)
If you see any error indication in the display while using the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the error indication,
take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
SOLUTION

CAUSE

INDICATION

CDP DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

After resetting the audio, push the eject button.

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Er2
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
FOCUS ERROR
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Er3
DATA READ ERROR

Then insert a normal CD disc.
Er6

DISC ERROR

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

Er7

LOADING ERROR

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.

TAPE DECK ERROR

After resetting the audio, push the eject button.

TAPE EJECT ERROR

If tape is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Er8

HHH

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

123
J290A01JM-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (J290) (If installed)
1. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND Select Button

7. TUNE Select Knob /
MODE Select Knob

6. EQ Button
3. SEEK Select Button
5. BEST STATION
MEMORY

4. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

J290A01JM

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
124
J290B01JM-GAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME
Control Knob
The radio unit may be operated when the ignition
key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the
button to switch the power on. The display
shows the radio frequency in the radio mode,
the tape direction indicator in the tape mode, or
CD track in the CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To
switch the power off, press the button again.

VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the
volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to
reduce the volume.

2. BAND Selector
Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 and
FM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on the
display.

3. SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the SEEK select button 1 sec. or more.
When the ( ) side is pressed, the unit will
automatically tune to the next higher frequency
and when the (
) side is pressed, it will
automatically tune to the next lower frequency.

4. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons

o When completed, any preset station may be
recalled by selecting AM, FM1 or FM2 band
and the appropriate station button.

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory
circuit.

5. Best Station Memory Button
(BSM)

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by
simply pressing the AM / FM select button and/
or one of the six station select buttons, you may
recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:
o Press AM/FM selector to set the band for
AM, FM1 and FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by
seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button
you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than
two seconds. A select button indicator will
show in the display indicating which select
button you have depressed. The frequency
display will flash after it has been stored into
the memory. You should then release the
button, and proceed to program the next
desired station. A total of 18 stations can be
programmed by selecting one AM and two
FM station per button.

When the BSM button is pressed for two seconds or longer, the six channels from the highest field intensity are selected next and stored
in memory. The stations selected are stored in
the sequence frequency from the first preset
key.

6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

7. TUNE (Manual) Select Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the
frequency and turn the knob counterclockwise
to reduce the frequency.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

125

Mode Select Knob

FAD (Fader Control)

Pressing the MODE button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
mode.
The mode selected is shown on the display.
After selecting the each mode, rotate the mode
select knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

Rotate the control knob clockwise to emphasize rear speaker sound (front speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob is
turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound
will be emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).

BASS Control

BALANCE Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the BASS, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.

MID Control
To increase the MID, rotate the knob clockwise,
while to decrease the MID, rotate the knob
counterclockwise.

TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the
knob counterclockwise.

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize right
speaker sound (left speaker sound will be
attenuated). When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).

CAUTION:

o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The audio system mechanism may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the audio system mechanism could be
damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
126
J290C01JM-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)
1.TAPE PROGRAM Button

2.EJECT Button

6.FF/REW Button
5.AUTO MUSIC Select Button
4.REPEAT Button
3. DOLBY Button

J290C01JM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

127
J290D01JM-GAT

1. TAPE PROGRAM Button
This allows you to play the reverse side of the
tape by merely pressing the program button.
The PLAY and an arrow will appear in the display
to show tape direction.

5. AUTO MUSIC Select Button
Press the button to find the starting point of each
song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet
space between songs (must have at least a 4
sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC
Select button.

o When the EJECT button is pressed with a
cassette loaded, the cassette will eject.
o When the EJECT button is pressed during
FF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

o Pressing the
will play the begin-ning of
the next music segment.
o Pressing the
will start replay at the
beginning of the music just listened to.
o To stop FF or REW action, press the button
again.

3. DOLBY Button

6. FF/REW Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,
you can reduce this considerably by merely
pressing the DOLBY button. If you want to
cancel the DOLBY feature, press the button
again.

o Fast forward tape winding starts when the
FF button is pressed during PLAY or REW
mode.
o PLAY starts when the FF button is pressed
again during FF mode.
o Tape rewinding starts when the REW button
is pressed during PLAY or FF mode.
o PLAY starts when the REW button pressed
again during REW mode.

2. EJECT Button

4. REPEAT Button
o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until you push
the button again.

CAUTION:

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
128
J290E01JM-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER / CD AUTO CHANGER OPERATION (J290) (If installed)
1.LOAD Button
2.Playing CD
3.EJECT Button

10.EQ Button
4. DISC Select
Button

9.SCAN Button

8.FF/REW Button
7.TRACK UP/DOWN
6.REPEAT Button
5.RANDOM Play Button

J290E01JM

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

129
J290F02JM-GAT

1. LOAD Button
This compact disc playing will accommodate up
to six discs.
To insert one disc do the following:
1. Press and release the LOAD Button.
2. Green light on both sides of the slot will be
illuminated and the will blink ten times on
the display.
3. Load a disc while the is blinking. Insert a
disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull the disc in.

NOTE:
o The disc can be only inserted while the
light is blinking.
o This CD player is suitable only for 12 cm
discs, do not use irregular shaped CDs.
When the disc is inserted, the disc will begin to
play automatically.
To insert multiple discs do the followings:
1. Press and hold the LOAD button for two
seconds or more.
You will then hear two beeps and the green
light on the both sides of the slot will be
illuminated.

2. Load a disc while the
is blinking. Insert
a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the numbers of the
vacant disc will blink on the display continuously. If the next "DISC NO." is appeared on
the display with the both side of the slot
illuminated, you can then load another disc.
3. Load the remaining disc by following the same
procedures 1 and 2.
When you finished loading 6 discs, the CD
player will begin to play the last CD loaded.
4. To load more than one disc but less than six,
complete Steps 1 and 2. When you have
finished loading discs, press LOAD button to
cancel the loading function or wait for 10
seconds. The CD player will begin to play the
last CD loaded.

2. Playing CD

As each CD starts to play, the DISC number will
appear on the display.

4.DISC Select Button

NOTE:
The disc player takes up to six discs. Do not
try to load more than six.

o Press the 6CDC to start CD playback,
during radio operation or cassette tape playing.
o When discs are in the CD deck, if you press
the 6CDC button the CD player will begin
playing even if the radio or cassette player
is being used.
o The CD player can be used when the ignition
switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

3. EJECT Button
o When the EJECT button
is pressed with
a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
o To eject all of the discs, press this button for
2 seconds or more.

To select the CD you want, push "DISC
" or "DISC " to change the disc number.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
130

5. RANDOM Button

8. FF/REW Button

With random, you can listen to the tracks in
random, rather than sequential order, on all of
the discs or on one disc.
To use random, do the following:

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FF
button continuously, the selected track is advanced. Holding down the REW button continuously moves the selected track back.

o Press and release the RDM button to play
the tracks on all of the discs or on one disc
that are loaded, in random order. RDM will
appear in the display. Press RDM to turn if
off.

9. SCAN Button

6. REPEAT Button
o To repeat the track you are currently listening to, press the RPT button. To cancel,
press again.
o If you do not release RPT operation after all
the tracks are played back, the unit will play
back again from the first track.

7. TRACK UP/DOWN
o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track
number.
o Press
once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track.
o Press
once to skip back to the beginning
of the track.

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
when you have reached the desired track.

10. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,
JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for the
desired tone quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT

NOTE:
o To assure proper operation of the unit,
keep the vehicle interior temperature
within a normal range by using the
vehicle's air conditioning or heating system.
o When replacing the fuse, replace it with
a fuse having the correct capacity.
o The preset station frequencies are all
erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be
set again if this should occur.
o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.
Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other
metallic objects away from the tape
mechanism and head.
o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with
negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do
not attempt to disassemble or adjust
any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to
keep the volume of the unit set low
enough to allow you to hear sounds
coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers and tape) to water or
excessive moisture.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

131

CAUTION:

o Do not insert warped or poor quality
discs into the CD player as damage to the
unit may occur.
o Do not insert anything like coins into the
player slot as damage to the unit may
occur.
o Do not place beverages close to the
audio system. The playback mechanism
may be damaged if you spill them.
o Do not impact on the audio system, or
the playback mechanism could be damaged.
o Driving off-road or other vibrations may
skip your compact disc.
Do not use the audio system off-roads
as the discs could be scratched and
damaged.
o Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into
the unit by the self loading mechanism.
These can cause disc scratching to occur or trouble in the compact disc player.
o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation.
When using the compact disc player,
genuine CDs are recommended.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
132
B890A01Y-AAT

AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
SOLUTION

CAUSE

INDICATION

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

If disc is not ejected, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Er2
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
FOCUS ERROR
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Er3
DATA READ ERROR

Then insert a normal CD disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Er6

DISC ERROR
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
TAPE DECK ERROR

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

TAPE EJECT ERROR

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Er8

HHH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE
Insert disc in magazine or insert CD magazine in the auto changer.

no CD
NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

CARE OF DISCS

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

B850A02F-AAT

133

B860A01A-AAT

Storage

Proper Handling

When not in use, place your discs in their
individual case and store them in a cool place
away from the sun, heat, and dust.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand
while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the
self loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B860A01L
B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the
disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,
it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do
not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the
disc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or
cracked discs. These could severely damage
the playback mechanism.

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc
could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.
Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.
If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean
soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent
to wipe it clean. See drawing.

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend
the tape life and increase your listening enjoyment. Always protect your tapes and cassette
cases from direct sunlight, severely cold and
dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes
should always be stored in the original protective cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot
or cold, allow the interior temperature to become
more comfortable before listening to your cassettes.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
134
o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player
when not being played. This could damage
the tape player unit and the cassette tape.
o We strongly recommend against the use of
tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).
Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin
and do not perform as well in the automotive
environment.

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the
open side facing down to prevent dust from
settling in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay
one given tune or tape section. This can
cause poor tape winding to occur, and eventually cause excessive internal drag and
poor audio quality in the cassette. If this
occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by
fast winding the tape from end to end several
times. If this does not correct the problem,
do not continue to use the tape in your
vehicle.

Head

B860A01JM

o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose
or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape
surfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as electric motors, speakers or transformers away
from your cassette tapes and tape player
unit.

Cotton applicator
B860A02L

o The playback head, capstan and pinch rollers will develop a coating of tape residue that
can result in deterioration of sound quality,
such as a wavering sound. They should be
cleaned monthly using a commercially available head cleaning tape or special solution
available from audio specialty shops. Follow
the supplier's directions carefully and never
oil any part of the tape player unit.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound
on its reel before inserting in the player.
Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind
up any slack.

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

ANTENNA

135

B870D01FC-GAT

Roof Antenna

CAUTION:

o Be sure to remove the antenna before
washing the car in an automatic car
wash or it may be damaged.
o Before entering a place with a low height
clearance, be sure to adjust the roof
antenna low.
o When reinstalling your antenna, it is
important that it is fully tightened to
ensure proper reception.
B860A03L

NOTE:
Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape
is loose, tighten it by turning one of the
hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label
is peeling off, do not put it in the drive
mechanism.
Do not leave tapes sitting where they are
exposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,
such as on top of the dashboard or in the
player. If a tape is excessively hot or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature before
putting it in the player.

HJM2172

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM
and FM broadcast signals.
This antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna
clockwise.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2
Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-4
Key Positions ................................................................ 2-4
Starting .......................................................................... 2-5
Manual Transaxle ......................................................... 2-6
Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................. 2-12
Traction Control System (TCS) .................................. 2-12
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............................. 2-14
Full-Time 4WD Operation ........................................... 2-15
4WD Lock System ...................................................... 2-18
Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-18
Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-19
Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-21
Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-23
Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-27

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

C010A02JM-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked
as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage
any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air
intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear
of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings
in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.
In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

RISK OF ROLLOVER

WARNING:

o The 2WD Tucson is not designed for offroad use. The 4WD Tucson is designed
primarily for use on paved roads. However, occasional use in off-highway conditions such as established unpaved
roads and non-challenging off-road
trails is allowed. The 4WD Tucson is not
designed for blazing new trails, challenging off-road conditions, or unpaved
hill climbing. Exceeding the conditions
that were intended for the vehicle's primary design may result in injury or death.
o Utility vehicle has a significantly higher
collision rate than other type of vehicles.

2
3

WARNING:

o Utility vehicle have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them
capable of performing in a wide variety
of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center
of gravitiy than ordinary cars. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a
better view of the road allowing you to
anticipate problem. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds
as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles
any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible,
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
o In a collision, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a person wearing a
seatbelt.

WARNING:

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are
no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other
indications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be sure the
parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.
4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors
are clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to
be sure they are in their proper positions.
6. Lock all the doors.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all
other occupants have fastened theirs.
8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are
not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",
check that all appropriate warning lights are
operating and that you have sufficient fuel.
10.Check the operation of warning lights and all
bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE
C030A01E-AAT

KEY POSITIONS
C040A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual
transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and
depress the clutch pedal fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,
place the shift lever in "P" (park).
o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and
turn it to the "START" position. Release it as
soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the
key in the "START" position for more that 15
seconds.

ACC
LOCK

START

NOTE:
o For safety, the engine will not start if the
clutch pedal is not depressed fully
(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever is
not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic
Transaxle).
o The ignition key cannot be turned from
"ACC" position to "LOCK" position unless the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)
position or the negative battery terminal
is disconnected from the battery. To
remove the key, always confirm that the
shift lever is securely positioned in "P"
(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).
o For additional information about starting, see page 2-5.

C040A01E-1

CAUTION:

The engine should not be turned off or the
key removed from the ignition key cylinder
while the car is in motion. The steering
wheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"
The engine is started in this position. It will crank
until you release the key.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

STARTING
NOTE:
Do not hold the key in the "START" position
for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"
When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignition
is on and all accessories may be turned on. If
the engine is not running, the key should not be
left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the
battery and may also damage the ignition system.

C070C01A-AAT

C050A01A-AAT

To remove the ignition key
ACC
LOCK

START

o "ACC"
With the key in the "ACC" position, some electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may be operated.

o "LOCK"
The key can be removed or inserted in this
position.
To protect against theft, the steering wheel
locks by removing the key.

NOTE:
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,
and then turn the steering wheel and key
simultaneously.

C050A01E-1
C070C01E-1

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition
key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"
position.

WARNING:

Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed to
move your car in or out of the area. The
carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless
and can cause serious injury or death.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSAXLE

6
C050B01JM-AAT

Normal Conditions:
The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the
gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral
or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in
"P" (park) position.
3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"
position, make certain all warning lights and
gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" position
and release it when the engine starts.
After the engine has started, allow the engine
to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing
the vehicle in gear.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 seconds between starting attempts to protect
the starter from overheating.

C070A02A-AAT

HJM3017

WARNING:

Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed
when starting a manual transaxle vehicle.
Your manual transaxle equipped vehicle
will not start unless the clutch pedal is fully
depressed.

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a conventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to
either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
7

NOTE:
o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after your
car is completely stopped. Then move
the lever into the reverse position.
o During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
o If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),
put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position
and release the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal down, and then shift into 1st or
R(Reverse) gear position.
o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest
during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

CAUTION:

When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth
gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear lever sideways in
such a manner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause
the engine speed to increase to the point
that the tachometer will enter the red-zone.
Such over-revving of the engine may cause
engine damage.

C070B02A-AAT

C070D02O-AAT

Using the Clutch

Recommended Shift Points

The clutch should be pressed all the way to the
floor before shifting, then released slowly. The
clutch pedal should always be fully returned to
the original position. Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car
on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear.
Use the foot brake or parking brake to hold the
car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.

Shift

Recommended

from-to

mph (km/h)

1-2

15 (20)

2-3

25 (40)

3-4

35 (55)

4-5

45 (75)

The shift points as shown on the chart are
recommended for optimum fuel economy and
performance.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
OPERATING THE AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE

8
C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices
o Never take the car out of gear and coast
down a hill. This is extremely hazardous.
Always leave the car in gear.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them
to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when
you are driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you do this,
engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.
This will help avoid over-revving the engine,
which can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.
This gives you much better control of your
car.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before
you attempt to shift into reverse. The
transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To
shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,
then shift to the reverse position.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a
slippery surface. Be especially careful when
braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out of
control.

C090A01O-GAT

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or
fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts.
In a collision, unbelted person is significantly more likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a person wearing a seatbelt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.

HJM3018

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle
has four forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the
speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2
gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:
For information on manual gate operation,
refer to "Sports Mode".
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4
positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid
inadvertent selection.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
9

NOTE:

C090C01A-AAT

Depress the brake pedal and push the
button when shifting.
Push the button when shifting.

o R(Reverse):
CAUTION:

Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the
vehicle is moving.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the
battery has been disconnected, may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust
after shifts are cycled a few times by the
T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the selector lever position when the
ignition is switched "ON". During "D" range
operation, green lights indicate the gear currently in use.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is as follows:

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to
a complete stop before shifting the selector
lever to "R" position.

C090D02O-AAT

o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,
which means that no gears are engaged. The
engine can be started with the shift lever in "N"
position, although this is not recommended
except if the engine stalls while the car is
moving.

o P (Park):
C090E01O-AAT

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or
while starting the engine. Whenever parking the
car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position.

!
C090A01JM

CAUTION:

Never place the selector lever in the "P"
(Park) position unless the vehicle is fully
stopped. Failure to observe this caution
will cause severe damage to the transaxle.

o D(Drive):
Use for normal driving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four gear sequence.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10
C090F01JM-GAT

Sports Mode

HJM3020

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,
sports mode is selected by pushing the selector
lever from the "D" position into the manual gate.
To return to "D" range operation, push the
selector lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make gearshifts simple.
UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up
one gear.
DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to
shift down one gear.
SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwards
or backwards twice, it is possible to skip one
gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st.

CAUTION:

o In sports mode, The driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing road
conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. For engine protection, upward shifts are made
automatically when the engine rpm
reaches the red zone.
o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice, it is possible to skip one
gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd. Since
sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction,
however, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's
speed.

NOTE:
o In sports mode, only the four forward
gears can be selected. To select reverse
or park, move the selector lever to the "R"
or "P" position as required.
o In sports mode, downward shifts are
made automatically when the vehicle
slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st
gear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts
when the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on a
slippery road, push the selector lever
forward into the +(UP) position. This
causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd
gear which is better for smooth driving
away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift
back to 1st gear.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:
o For smooth and safe operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a
forward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the "ON"
position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever
from the "P" (Park) position to any of the
other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R",
"N", "D" position to "P" position. The
vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid
transaxle damage.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
11

C090I02L-GAT

C090N03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

CAUTION:

o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when
the vehicle has completely stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse
or any of the forward positions with the
brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position.
o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in
place of the parking brake. Always set
the parking brake, shift the transaxle
into "P" (Park) position and turn off the
ignition when you leave the vehicle, even
momentarily. Never leave the vehicle
unattended while the engine is running.
o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level
regularly, and add fluid as necessary.
o See the maintenance section for the
proper fluid recommendation.

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"
or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"
when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped before
you attempt to shift into "R".
o Never take the car out of gear and coast
down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when
moving.
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction. Instead,
when you are driving down a long hill, slow
down and shift to a lower gear. When you do
this, engine braking will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.
Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep
the car from moving.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a
slippery surface. Be especially careful when
braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to
lose traction and the vehicle to go out of
control.

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or
fast, sharp turns.
o Always wear your seat belts.
In a collision crash, un unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seatbelt.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
o Excessive depressing of the accelerater
pedal in slippery driving conditions such
as pulling out of deep snow or mud may
cause severe damage to the transaxle.
Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.
Rather, use an appropriate towing
method.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM (TCS)

C120A02A-AAT

(If installed)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed
to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking
or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,
in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS
will increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:
During ABS operation, a pulsation may be
felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are
applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the
engine compartment while braking. These
conditions are normal and indicate that the
anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.

C300A03Y-GAT

(If installed)
WARNING:

ABS will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers.
Even though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always
be reduced during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars equipped
with an anti-lock braking system may be
longer than for those without it in the
following road conditions. During these
conditions the vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
o With tire chains installed.
o On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.
The safety features of an ABS equipped
vehicle should not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could endanger
the safety of yourself or others.

C300A01JM-U

On slippery road surfaces, the traction control
system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from
spinning excessively, thus helping the car to
accelerate. It also helps to provide sufficient
driving force and steering performance as the
car turns.

SLIP Control
Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the
driving force of the front wheels.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
13

Driving Hints
TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to
decelerate the car sufficiently before entering
curves.

CAUTION:

When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control function has been activated. It also
means that the road is slippery or your car
is accelerating excessively. In this situation, gently release foot pressure from the
accelerator pedal and maintain moderate
speed.

WARNING:

Traction control is a driving aid; all normal
precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery driving surfaces should
be observed.

C310B02O-AAT

C310D01JM-AAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

Indicators and Warning

When the TCS is operating, the TCS indicator
in the instrument cluster will blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS
switch, the TCS-OFF indicator will come on and
stay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control
will be deactivated. Adjust you driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the
switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator should go
off.

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should
go out after approximately three seconds.
If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS or
TCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3
seconds, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.

NOTE:
1) The TCS mode will automatically be
turned ON after the engine is turned off
and restarted.
2) When the traction control system is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates
nothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click may be
heard from the engine compartment;
this is the sound of the traction control
being checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or fresh
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal
may not cause the engine speed to increase due to TCS operation.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the
TCS System while driving, TCS-OFF indicator
illuminates as a warning.
If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car
to a safe place and stop the engine.
Then, start the engine again to check if the TCSOFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine
has been started, have your car checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:
When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,
traction control is automatically deactivated.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
14

ELECTRONIC STABILITY
PROGRAM (ESP)
C310B01JM-AAT

C310A01JM-AAT

(If installed)

ESP ON/OFF Mode
CAUTION:

Driving with varying tire or wheel size may
cause the ESP system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they are the same
size as your original tires.

!
C310A01JM-U

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system
is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering manuevers. ESP checks where you are
steering and where the vehicle is actually going.
ESP applies the brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management system
to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system
is an electronic system designed to help the
driver maintain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving
practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESP will be effective in preventing a
loss of control. It is still your responsibility to
drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

WARNING:

Electronic stability program is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in
inclement weather and on slippery road
surfaces should be observed.

When the ESP is operating, the ESP indicator in
the instrument cluster will blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing the ESP
switch, the ESP-OFF indicator will come on and
stay on. In the ESP-OFF mode, the stability
control will be deactivated. Adjust your driving
accordingly. To turn the system back on, press
the switch again. The ESP-OFF indicator should
go off.

NOTE:
The ESP mode will automatically be turned
ON after the engine is turned off and restarted.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

FULL-TIME 4WD OPERATION
C310D01JM-AAT

C350A02JM-AAT

Indicators and Warning

(If installed)

The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should
go out after three seconds.
If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESP or
ESP-OFF indicator does not go out after 3
seconds, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.

Engine power can be delivered to all wheels.
Full-time 4WD is useful when good traction is
required, such as, when driving on slippery, wet
or snow-covered roads and when moving out
of mud. Your vehicle is not designed for challenging off-road use. Full-time 4WD vehicles
are designed primarily to improve traction and
performance on paved roads and highways in
wet and/or slippery conditions. Occasional offroad use such as established unpaved roads
and trails is considered normal use. It is always
important when traveling off-highway that the
driver carefully reduce their speed to a level that
does not exceed the safe operating speed for
those conditions. In general, off-road conditions
provide less traction and braking effectiveness
than on road conditions. These factors must be
carefully considered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving
surface and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the safety
of him/herself and his or her passengers.

Should there be any unusual conditions in the
device while driving, ESP-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning.
If ESP-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car
to a safe place and stop the engine.
Then, start the engine again to check if the ESPOFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine
has been started, have your car checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.

2
15

WARNING:

This vehicle is designed primarily for on
road use. Driving the vehicle in challenging
off-road conditions may result in damage
to the vehicle. Driving in conditions that
exceed the vehicle's intended design or the
driver's experience level may result in severe injury or death.

Driving 4WD Safely
(1) As always, be sure to wear the seat belt.
(2) Do not drive in challenging off-road conditions or areas that exceed the vehicle's
basic design intent or the driver's experience level.
(3) Drive at lower speeds in strong crosswinds.
Because of your vehicle's higher center of
gravity, its stability will be affected in crosswinds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
control.
(4) Check the brake condition after driving in wet
or muddy conditions. Press the brake several times as you move slowly until you feel
normal braking forces return.
(5) Do not drive the vehicle through water. (i.e.
streams, rivers, lakes, etc.)

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
16
(6) The stopping distance of the full-time 4WD
vehicle differs very little from that of the 2WD
vehicle.
When driving on a snow-covered road or a
slippery, muddy surface, make sure that
you keep a sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the one ahead of you.
(7) Since the driving torque is always applied to
all 4 wheels, the performance of the full-time
4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the condition of the tires. Be sure to equip it with four
tires of the same size and type.
o When replacement of any of the tires or
wheels is necessary, replace all of them
with tires or wheels of the same size type.
o Rotate the tires and check the tire pressure at regular intervals.

WARNING:

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide for safe ride and handling
capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel
that is different from the one that is originally installed on your vehicle. It can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to equip
all four tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and loadcarrying capacity. If you nevertheless decide to equip your vehicle with any tire/
wheel combination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you should
not use these tires for highway driving.
(8) The full-time 4WD vehicle cannot be
towed by an ordinary tow truck. Make
sure that the vehicle is towed with all
four wheels raised off the ground.
o Roadside Assistance Program:
Off-roading is not covered. To receive
service, the vehicle must be on a publicly
maintained road.
o If the vehicle is towed with only two
wheels raised off the ground, the 4WD
system could be damaged.

o In unavoidable cases, if the vehicle is
being towed with all four wheels on the
ground, it should only be towed forward.
o While towing, check the following items.
1. The ignition switch is in "ACC" or
"ON".
2. Place the shift lever in neutral (For
Automatic Transaxle, "N" position).
3. Release the parking brake.

NOTE:
To avoid serious damage to your 4WD vehicle, limit towing to 10 mph and not for
more than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

Temporary free roller
Roll tester(Speedometer)
HJM1029

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
17

(9)For a speedometer test or inspection/maintenance (I/M) program of a Tucson 4WD
vehicle, use a four wheel chassis dynamometer.

CAUTION:

Never engage the parking brake while performing these tests.
o In rare cases when it's unavoidable that
a 4WD vehicle is to be inspected on a
2WD roll tester, strictly follow the procedures.
1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester as shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the illustration.

WARNING:

Keep away from the front of the vehicle
while inspecting. This is very dangerous as
the vehicle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.

(10)When using tire chains, always attach them
to the front wheels.
(11)If the front or rear wheels get stuck in the
mud, do not spin them recklessly. The 4WD
system could be damaged.

CAUTION:

o While the full-time 4WD vehicle is being
raised on a jack, never start the engine or
cause the tires to rotate.
There is danger that rotating tires touching the ground could cause the vehicle
to go off the jack and to jump forward.
o If one of the front or rear wheels begins
to spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehicle
can sometimes be driven out by depressing the accelerator pedal further;
however, avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm because doing so
could damage the 4WD system.

WARNING:

o Avoid high cornering speeds.
o Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane charges or
fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if
you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.
o In a collision, an unbelted person is
signicantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a person wearing a
seat belt.
o Loss of control may occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway and
the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into the travel
lanes.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

4WD LOCK SYSTEM
To release the 4WD lock function, press the
4WD lock button again.
The 4WD lock indicator light in the instrument
cluster should go off.

C360A01O-GAT

(With Electronic Control 4WD)
(If installed)

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Nothing should be carried on top of the
cargo area cover behind the rear seat. If
there were an accident or a sudden stop,
such objects could move forward and cause
damage to the vehicle or injure the occupants.

C360A01JM-U

This 4WD system is designed for dividing the
power ratio automatically in normal driving conditions.
During off-road or low-friction driving conditions, press the 4WD lock button to drive in fulltime 4WD, dividing the power ratio to 50:50 in the
front and rear wheels. The 4WD lock indicator
light in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
This setup begins to get cancelled when the
vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h, and the function is completely released at a speed of 40 km/
h or higher. Conversely, the function is rerun
when the speed again drops to 40 km/h or lower,
and is fully established at speeds below 30 km/
h.

C360A02JM

1) Pressing the 4WD lock button on the tough
terrain, the driving power is equally distributed to the front and rear.
4WD lock keeps activating when not exceeding 40 km/h.
2) Release the 4WD lock button on the normal
driving conditions.

o After being parked, check to be sure the
parking brake is not engaged and that the
parking brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakes
wet. They can also get wet when the car is
washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!
Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes
are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to
pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the
brakes lightly while driving slowly until the
braking action returns to normal, taking care
to keep the car under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to normal,
stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your
Hyundai dealer for assistance.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY
o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.
This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car
in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow
down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine
braking will help you maintain a safe speed.
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your
foot on the brake pedal while driving can be
dangerous because it can result in the brakes
overheating and losing their effectiveness. It
also increases the wear of the brake components.
o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply
the brakes gently and keep the car pointed
straight ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe
to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
o If your car is equipped with an automatic
transaxle, don't let your car creep forward.
To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the car is
stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engage
the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your
car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the car from rolling.
If your car is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help keep the
car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep the car
from rolling, block the wheels.
o Under some conditions your parking brake
can freeze in the engaged position. This is
most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there
is a risk that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you put the
gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in
first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with
the accelerator pedal. This can cause the
transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from your
car if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate
rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or fullthrottle shifts and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to
adjust your speed to that of the other traffic
so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you
drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at
a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components. In
addition, driving with your foot resting on the
brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and
may lead to more serious consequences.
o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated
to the recommended pressure. Incorrect
inflation, either too much or too little, results
in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.

2
19

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
SMOOTH CORNERING

20
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from
hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire
wear and may also result in other problems
as well as greater fuel consumption.
o Keep your car in good condition. For better
fuel economy and reduced maintenance
costs, maintain your car in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If
you drive your car in severe conditions,
more frequent maintenance is required (see
Section 5 for details).
o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,
your Hyundai should be kept clean and free
of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to
accumulate on the underside of the car. This
extra weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),
turn off your engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not require
extended warm-up. As soon as the engine
is running smoothly, you can drive away. In
very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.
o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging
is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens,
shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be
avoided by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air
conditioning system is operated by engine
power so your fuel economy is reduced
when you use it.

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,
especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners
should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear
will be held to a minimum.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WINTER DRIVING

C160A01A-AAT

NOTE:

The more severe weather conditions of winter
result in greater wear and other problems. To
minimize the problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:

o Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
o Tire chains are to be used on front tires
only.

C160B01JM-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be
necessary to use snow tires or to install tire
chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,
it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment tires. Failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous
practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking to the
fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on
snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.
You need to keep sufficient distance between
the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.
Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will provide
a greater driving force, but will not prevent side
skids.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol
Coolant
Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It
is the only type of coolant that should be used
because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and
prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure that its
freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures
anticipated during the winter.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the battery
system. Visually inspect the battery and cables
as described in Section 6. The level of charge
in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai
dealer or a service station.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if
Necessary
In some climates it is recommended that a lower
viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold
weather. See Section 9 for recommendations.
If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,
consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
System
Inspect your spark plugs as described in Section 6 and replace them if necessary. Also
check all ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in
any way.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
22
C160G01A-AAT

C160I01A-AAT

C160K01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Carry Emergency Equipment

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key
opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If
the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to
thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.

Depending on the severity of the weather where
you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items
you may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C160H02A-AAT

Under some conditions your parking brake can
freeze in the engaged position. This is most
likely to happen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes
or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"
(automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.

Use Approved Window Washer AntiFreeze in System

C160J01A-AAT

To keep the water in the window washer system
from freezing, add an approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer antifreeze is available from Hyundai dealers and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these
may damage the paint finish.

Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate
Underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice can build
up under the fenders and interfere with the
steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in
overheating and possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may
result in reduced traction or tire failure.

USE OF LIGHTS

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C180A01A-AAT

C190A01S-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct operation and always keep them clean. When driving
during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it
is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.
This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

If you are considering towing with your car, you
should first check with your State's Department
of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary from State to State the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask your
Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.

NOTE:
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel than
urban motoring. Do not forget to check both
engine coolant and engine oil.
3. Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result in
overheating of the engine.

CAUTION:

Do not do any towing with your car during
its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order to
allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.

2
23

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
24
C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches
Select the proper hitch and ball combination,
making sure that its location is compatible with
that of the trailer or vehicle being towed.
Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes the tongue load uniformly throughout the
chassis.
The hitch should be bolted securely to the car
and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT
USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY
INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT
ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C190E01JM-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit
CAUTION:

o Never connect a trailer brake system
directly to the vehicle brake system.
o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in
excess of 12%) pay close attention to the
engine coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not overheat. If
the needle of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial towards
"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as
it is safe to do so, and allow the engine
to idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed and
operating correctly.

NOTE:
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will
require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. See Maintenance Under
Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains
Should the hitch connection between your vehicle and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail,
the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously
across other lanes of traffic and ultimately leave
the roadway. To eliminate this potentially dangerous situation, safety chains, attached between your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,
are required in most states.

Tongue load

Total trailer weight
C190E01JM

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailer
load.
o Tongue load
x 100 = 10% (MAX)
Total trailer weight
o Tongue loads can be increased or decreased by re-distributing the load in the
trailer.
This can be verified by checking the total
weight of the loaded trailer and then checking
the load on the tongue.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
25

NOTE:
1. Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front. About 60% of
the trailer load should be in the front half
on the trailer and the remaining 40% in
the rear.
2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer
must not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the
vehicle identification plate (see page 82). The total gross vehicle weight is the
combined weight of the vehicle, driver,
all passengers and their luggage, cargo,
hitch, trailer tongue load and other optional equipment.
3. The front or rear axle weight must not
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). It is possible
that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.
Improper trailer loading and/or too much
luggage in the cargo area can overload
the rear axle. Redistribute the load and
check the axle weight again.

CAUTION:

The following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded
trailer weight cannot safely exceed the values in the chart.
Lbs. (kg)
Engine
With
Brake
Without
Brake

2.0L
2.7L
2.0L
2.7L

Maximum Towable Weight
Tongue
Trailer
1500(680)
2,000(907)
150 (68)
1,000(454)

WARNING:

o Improperly loading your vehicle and
trailer can seriously affect its steering
and braking performance causing a
crash which could cause serious injury
or death.
o Towing a trailer affected vehicle handling and braking.
o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer
and allow more distance when braking.
o Be careful when driving in slippery and
windy conditions.
o Be careful when turning and while driving up and down hills.
o Do not exceed 45 mph or the posted
towing speed limit, whichever is lower.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
26
C190F01O-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain
connections as well as proper operation of
the trailer running lights, brake lights, and
turn signals.
2. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
conditions.
3. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
tow a trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear
(manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic
transaxle).
4. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
5. Check the condition and air pressure of all
tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire
pressure can seriously affect the handling.
Also check the spare tire.
6. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting.
When being passed by a large vehicle, keep
a constant speed and steer straight ahead.
If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down
to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.
7. When parking your car and trailer, especially
on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal
precautions. Turn your front wheel into the
curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the
transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park
(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks
at each of the trailer's tires.

8. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your
vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes are working. This lets you check
your electrical connection at the same time.
9. During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
10.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or
sudden stops.
11.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
12.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the brakes
to overheat, resulting in reduced braking
efficiency.
13.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear
and use the engine braking effect.
When ascending a long grade, downshift the
transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed
to reduce chances of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
14.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not
hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the
accelerator. This can cause the automatic
transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake
or footbrake.
15.If the transaxle shifts frequently while going
up a hill, shift down one gear.

NOTE:
When towing check transaxle fluid more
frequently.

CAUTION:

If overheating should occur when towing,
(the temperature gauge reads near the red
zone), taking the following actions may
reduce or eliminate the problem.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn off the air conditioner.
Reduce highway speed.
Select a lower gear when going uphill.
While in stop and go traffic, place the
gear selector in park or neutral and idle
the engine at a higher speed.

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

2
27

C190F02JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01JM

The tire label located on the driver's
side of the center pillar outer panel
gives the original tire size, cold tire
pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be
in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.

Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1)Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds'' on your
vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
28

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

C
A

Description

Total

Item

Description

1400 lbs
A

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Available Cargo and

1100 lbs

Item

Description

Total
1400 lbs

Vehicle Capacity Weight

(635 kg)

Subtract Occupant Weight 750 lbs

Subtract Occupant Weight 860 lbs
B

150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

(340 kg)

Available Cargo and

650 lbs

C
(498 kg)

C
C190F03JM

B
(136 kg)

Luggage weight

Total

Vehicle Capacity Weight

(635 kg)

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

1400 lbs
A

Subtract Occupant Weight 300 lbs
B

C190F02JM

C190F01JM

Item

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

540 lbs
C

Luggage Weight

(295 kg)

(390 kg)

Available Cargo Weight
(245 kg)

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2
29

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading
information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.

C190G01JM-AAT

This label also tells you the maximum
weights that can be supported by the
front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out
your load equally on both sides of the
centerline.

Compliance Label

C190G01JM

The compliance label is located on the
driver's side of the center piller outer
panel.
The label shows the size of your original
tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

WARNING:
o Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, or the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle.
o Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, or either
the maximum front or rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle
can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
30

NOTE:
o Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
o Using heavier suspension components to get added durability
might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
The label will help you decide how much
cargo and installed equipment your
vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle –
like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else – they more as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, the items
will keep going and can cause an injury
if they strikes the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:
Items you carry inside your vehicle
can strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
o Put things in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
o Never stack items, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle above the tops
of the seats.
o Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
o When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it.
o Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

If the Engine will not Start .............................................. 3-2
Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3
If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4
Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5
If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-7
If Your Car Must be Towed ......................................... 3-12
Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-14
If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-15

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
2

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
D010A01A-AAT

D010B02A-AAT

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns
Over Slowly

If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does
Not Start

WARNING:

1. Check fuel level.
2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all
connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or
loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundai
dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

If the engine will not start, do not push or
pull the car to start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving
HJM5008

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be
sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"
and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure
they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or
goes out when you operate the starter, the
battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure
they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See
instructions for "Jump Starting".

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a
straight line. Move cautiously off the road to
a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle
will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

JUMP STARTING

D020A03A-AAT

Discharged
battery

Booster battery

HJM4001

WARNING:

The gas produced by the battery during the
jump-start operation is highly explosive. If
these instructions are not followed exactly,
serious personal injury and damage to the
vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how
to follow this procedure, seek qualified
assistance. Automobile batteries contain
sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get
acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

o If you should accidentally get acid on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately remove
any contaminated clothing and flush the area
with clear water for at least 15 minutes. Then
promptly obtain medical attention. If you
must be transported to an emergency facility, continue to apply water to the affected
area with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during the
jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do
not smoke or allow a spark or an open flame
in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the jump
start must be 12-volt. If you cannot determine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt
to use it for the jump start.
o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,
follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed in another
vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not
touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories in both vehicles.
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the
exact location shown on the illustration. First,
attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post or cable of the discharged
battery.

Then attach the other end of the same cable
to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster
battery. Next, using the other cable, attach
one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable
of the booster battery. Then attach the other
end of that cable to a solid metal part of the
engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery away from the battery. Do not connect the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with the booster
battery and let it run for a few minutes. This
will help to assure that the booster battery is
fully charged. During the jumping operation,
run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000
rpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery using the normal starting
procedure. After the engine starts, leave the
jumper cables connected and let the engine
run at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for several
minutes.
6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order of attachment.
If you do not know why your battery became
discharged (because the lights were left on,
etc.), have the charging system checked by
your Hyundai dealer.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
4

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud
pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set
the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,
turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the car
or steam is coming out from the hood, stop
the engine. Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is
not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is
missing. If it is not missing, check to see that
it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from
the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the
air conditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it when you
stop).

WARNING:

While the engine is running, keep hair,
hands and clothing away from moving parts
such as the fan and drive belts to prevent
injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or
engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine
immediately and call the nearest Hyundai
dealer for assistance.

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be
blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has
returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir
(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating
happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for
assistance.

CAUTION:

Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a
leak in the cooling system and this should
be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai
dealer.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

SPARE TIRE

3
5

D040A01JM-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE
The following instructions for the temporary spare tire should be observed:
1. Check inflation pressure as soon as
practical after installing the spare
tire, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tire pressure should be
periodically checked and maintained
at the specified pressure while the
tire is stored.
Spare Tire Pressure
Tire Size

T155/90R16

Inflation Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa)

2. The spare tire should only be used
temporarily and should be returned
to the luggage compartment as soon
as the original tire can be repaired or
replaced.
3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50
mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

4. As the temporary spare tire is specifically designed for your vehicle, it
should not be used on any other
vehicle.
5. The temporary spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the temporary spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components
may occur.
6. The temporary spare tire pressure
should be checked once a month
while the tire is stored.

CAUTION:
o Do not use snow chains with your
temporary spare tire.
o Do not use more than one temporary spare tire at a time.
o Do not tow a trailer while the temporary spare tire is installed.

D040B01JM-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

HJM2167

To remove the spare tire
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the luggage mat.
3. Remove the luggage under tray cover
to turn the lever toward "UNLOCK".
4. Remove the luggage under tray.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D050A02A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

HJM4008

5. Turn the installation bolt counterclockwise with a wheel nut wrench to
remove the spare tire. After replacing the spare tire, install and tighten
the bolt firmly with your fingers until
there is no more play in the spare tire.

1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the car slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply
the brakes immediately or attempt to
pull off the road as this may cause a
loss of control. When the vehicle has
slowed to such a speed that it is safe
to do so, brake carefully and pull off
the road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area
between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle
in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual
transaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4. Change the tire following the instructions provided on the following pages.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

3
7

D060A02HP-AAT

D060B01JM-AAT

D060A01JM

The procedure described on the following pages can be used to rotate tires as
well as to change a flat tire. When
preparing to change a flat tire, check to
be sure the gear selector lever is in "P"
(automatic) or reverse gear (manual
transaxle) and that the parking brake is
set, then:

WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide for safe ride and
handling capability.
Do not use a size and type of tire and
wheel that is different from the one
that is originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to handling failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel combination not recommended by
Hyundai for off-road driving, you
should not use these tires for highway driving.

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

HJM4007

Remove the spare tire and remove the
jack and tool bag from the luggage
compartment.
NOTE:
The spare tire is located under the
luggage compartment floor.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
8
D060C02A-AAT

D060D01A-AAT

D060E01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

4. Put the Jack in Place

Flat tire

HJM4009

Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat to keep the vehicle
from rolling when the vehicle is raised
on the jack.

HJM4015

The wheel nuts should be loosened
slightly before raising the car. To loosen
the nuts, turn the wrench handle counterclockwise. When doing this, be sure
that the socket is seated completely
over the nut so it cannot slip off. For
maximum leverage, position the wrench
so the handle is to the left as shown in
the drawing. Then, while holding the
wrench near the end of the handle, push
down on it with steady pressure. Do not
remove the nuts at this time. Just
loosen them about one-half turn.

HJM4010

The base of the jack should be placed
on firm, level ground. The jack should
be positioned as shown in the drawing.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3
9

D060F03E-AAT

Raise the car high enough so that the
fully inflated spare tire can be installed.
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.

5. Raising the vehicle

Wrench bar

D060G01JM-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Wheel nut
wrench
HFC4022

After inserting the wrench bar into the
wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar
into the jack as shown in the drawing.
To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut
wrench clockwise. As the jack begins
to raise the vehicle, double check that
it is properly positioned and will not slip.
If the jack is on soft ground or sand,
place a board, brick, flat stone or other
object under the base of the jack to
keep it from sinking.

WARNING:
Do not get under the vehicle when it
is supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the vehicle
while the jack is being used.

D060G01JM

Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them. Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put
the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare
tire, line up the holes with the studs and
slide the wheel onto them. If this is
difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get
the top hole in the wheel lined up with
the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be slid over
the other studs.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
10
D060H02O-AAT

D060G02JM

WARNING:
If the vehicle has been driven recently, some pieces may be very hot.
Use caution.

WARNING:
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the hub
or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,
etc.) that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the hub. If
there is, remove it. If there is not
good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the
wheel nuts could come loose and
cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a
wheel may result in loss of control of
the vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

D060H01JM

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs
and tighten them finger tight. The nuts
should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely seated,
then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3
11

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

After changing wheels, have a technician tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels
HJM4016

Lower the car to the ground by turning
the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
other nut until they are all tight. Then
double-check each nut for tightness.

D060J01JM

If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure. If
the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct
pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until
it is correct. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air
may leak from the tire. If you lose a
valve cap, buy another and install it as
soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and
return the jack and tools to their proper
storage locations.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
12

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE
TOWED
D080B02O-AAT

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be done
by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow
truck service. This will help assure that your
vehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. In any case, rather than risk
damage to your car, it is suggested that you
show this information to the tow truck operator.
Be sure that a safety chain system is used and
that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed
with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
with all the wheels off the ground.

Towing the 2 Wheel Drive Vehicle
CAUTION:

o When towing the vehicle, take care not to
cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle.

dolly

CAUTION:

o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed
incorrectly!
o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.
o When the engine will not start, be sure
the steering is unlocked by placing the
key in the "ACC" position.

3)
D080A01JM

o Do not tow with sling type truck as this
may cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.

D080B03JM

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift type
truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3
13

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rear
wheels on the ground, be sure the parking
brake is released.

D080B02O-AAT

Towing the 4 Wheel Drive Vehicle
CAUTION:

NOTE:
Before towing, check the level of the automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"
range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you
cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be
used.

dolly

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspension
components are damaged or the vehicle is
being towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
HJM4019

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle should
never be towed from the rear with the front
wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle. Be sure to
use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
3) It is recommended that your vehicle be
towed with all the wheels off the ground.

dolly

D080C04JM

When towing the 4WD vehicle, it must be towed
by lifting all 4 wheels or using the towing dolly.

3 WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
14
For emergency towing when no commercial
tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,
chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under
the front/rear of your vehicle. Be very careful
when attempting this procedure when the vehicle is on any unpaved surface to avoid damage to your vehicle.
Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,
drive train, axles, steering or brakes are damaged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in
neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine
off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine
running). A driver must be in the towed vehicle
to steer it and operate the brakes.

D080D02O-AAT

EMERGENCY TOWING
CAUTION:

o The 4WD vehicle should never be towed
with the wheels on the ground. This can
cause serious damage to the transaxle
or the 4WD system.
o When towing the vehicle, take care not to
cause damage to the bumper or underbody of the vehicle.

Towing Hooks
HJM4022

To avoid serious damage to your 4WD vehicle, limit the towing to 10 mph and not for
more than 1 mile at ANY TIME.

D080C03JM

o Do not tow with sling type truck as this
may cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.

NOTE:

Towing Hook
HJM4023

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealers
can make you a new key if you have your key
number. If you lock the keys inside your car and
you cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai
dealers can use special tools to open the door
for you.

3
15

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2
To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2
Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3
Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

CORROSION PROTECTION
E010A01A-AAT

E010C01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corrosion

High-Corrosion Areas

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion,
Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.
However, this is only part of the job. To achieve
the long-term corrosion resistance your
Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation
and assistance is also required.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your
car are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to
accumulate underneath the car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings by
stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes
and dents which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.

If you live in an area where your car is regularly
exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are
road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air
and industrial pollution.
E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is
kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow
to dry and holds moisture in contact with the
vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it
can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so
the moisture can be dispersed. For all these
reasons, it is particularly important to keep your
car clean and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to the
visible surfaces but particularly to the underside
of the car.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from getting
started by observing the following:

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep
your car clean and free of corrosive materials.
Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area — where
road salts are used, near the ocean, areas
with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent corrosion.
In winter, hose off the underside of your car
at least once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when winter is
over.
o When cleaning underneath the car, give
particular attention to the components under
the fenders and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening
the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in removing
accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

WASHING AND WAXING
o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker
panels and frame members, be sure that
drain holes are kept open so that moisture
can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

E030A01A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Washing Your Hyundai

Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If
bare metal is showing through, the attention of
a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Never wash your car when the surface is hot
from being in the sun. Always wash your car in
the shade.

E020C02A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. This creates a favorable environment
for corrosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your car in the garage or drive it into the
garage when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just
a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats and
carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the
mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,
flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and
can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air
pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and
trim through chemical action if pollutants are
allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If
you live near the ocean or in an area where road
salts or dust control chemicals are used, you
should pay particular attention to the underside
of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust
and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven
through mud or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard
direct stream of water to remove accumulations
of mud or corrosive materials. Use a good
quality car-washing solution and follow the
manufacturer's directions on the package.
These are available at your Hyundai dealer or
auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household
detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abrasive cleaning powders as these may damage
the finish.
Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently
and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.
For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently
and remove them a little at a time.

4
3

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or
soapy steel-wool scouring pad.
To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean
sponge or soft cloth and water.
To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild
soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive
cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by
cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because aluminum is subject to corrosion, be sure to give
aluminum alloy wheels special attention in winter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the
wheels thoroughly afterwards.
After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If
soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will
result.
When the weather is warm and the humidity low,
you may find it necessary to rinse each section
immediately after washing to avoid streaking.
After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois
or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying
the car is to remove water from the car so it will
dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can
damage the finish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,
use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent
corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car
against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai
(at least once a month). Give special attention
to the removal of salt, mud and other substances on the underside of the splashboards
of the car. Make sure that the outlets and the
underside of the doors are open. Paint damage
can be caused by small accumulation of tar,
industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and
bird droppings, when not removed immediately.
If water alone is not strong enough to remove the
accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solution. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing
to remove the solution. Never allow the solution
to dry on the painted surfaces.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corrosive cleaning agents. These can damage the
finish of the car. To remove road tar, use
turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.
To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm
water and mild soap or car-washing solution.
Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost
its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing
Always wash and dry the car before polishing
or waxing or using a combination cleaner and
wax. Use a good quality commercial product
and follow the manufacturer's directions on the
container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces
as well as the paint.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again
You should polish and wax the car again when
water no longer beads on a clean surface but
spreads out over a larger area.

CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E030E01A-AAT

E040A01A-AAT

E040B01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

Special precautions must be observed to preserve the appearance of the bumpers on your
Hyundai. They are:

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose
dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply
a solution of mild soap or detergent and water
using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to
stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe
with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt
stains are not removed, repeat this procedure
until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other strong cleaners.

To Clean the Leather Upholstery
(If installed)

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or
hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you
do, wash it off immediately with clear water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper surfaces. They are made of soft plastic and the
surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do
not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water
and mild soap or car-washing solution.
o Do not expose the bumpers to high temperatures. For example, if you have your car
repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the
car if the car is going to be placed in a hightemperature paint booth.

In the normal course of use, leather upholstered
surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and
dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it
may work into the surface of the leather, causing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned
when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly
with soap and water will keep your leather
lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many
years of wear.
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild
soap and lukewarm water, work up a good
lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean
with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.
Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.
During tanning operations, sufficient oils are
incorporated through processing that none need
be applied during the life of the leather. Oil
applied to the finished surface will in no way help
the leather and may do more harm than good.
Varnishes and furniture polishes should never
be used under any conditions.

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
ANY QUESTIONS?

6
E040C01A-AAT

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Cleaning the Windows

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of
this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid
form or powder. Read the instructions and
follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner
with the appropriate attachment, remove as
much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply
the foam following the manufacturer's directions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add
water. These cleaners work best when the
carpet is kept as dry as possible.

You may use any household window cleaner on
the windows. However, when cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to damage
the rear window defroster wiring.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge
with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do
not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the seat belts as this may
weaken the fabric.
While cleaning the belts, inspect them for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of
damage and replace them if necessary.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of your
car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4
Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
F010A01A-AAT

F010B01A-AAT

F010C01A-AAT

Service Requirements

Maintenance Requirements

Specified Scheduled Procedures

To ensure that you receive the greatest number
of miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,
certain maintenance procedures must be performed. Although careful design and engineering have reduced these to a minimum, those that
are required are of the utmost importance.
It is your responsibility to have these maintenance procedures performed to comply with
the terms of the warranties covering your new
Hyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied with
your new vehicle provides further information
about these warranties.

The maintenance required for your Hyundai
can be divided into three main areas:

These are the procedures such as inspections,
adjustments and replacements that are listed in
the maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.
These procedures must be performed at the
intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to
assure that your warranty remains in effect.
Although it is strongly recommended that they
be performed by the trained technicians at your
Hyundai dealer, these procedures may be performed at any qualified service facility.
It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service
parts be used for any required repairs or replacements. Other parts of equivalent quality
such as engine oil, engine coolant, manual or
auto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on which
are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or
its distributor may be used without affecting
your warranty coverage but you should always
be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the
original Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Handbook provides further information about your
warranty coverage.

o Specified scheduled procedures
o General checks
o Do-it-yourself maintenance

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5
3

F010D02A-AAT

F010F01A-AAT

F020A02Y-AAT

General Checks

A Few Tips

These are the regular checks you should perform when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the
fuel tank. A list of these items will be found on
page 6-4.

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,
keep copies of the service records in your
glovebox. This will help ensure that you can
document that the required procedures have
been performed to keep your warranties in
effect. This is especially important when
service is not performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
o If you choose to do your own maintenance
and repairs, you may find it helpful to have
an official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy of
this publication may be purchased at your
Hyundai dealer's parts department.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance
If you are mechanically inclined, own a few tools
that are required and want to take the time to do
so, you can inspect and service a number of
items. For more information about doing it yourself, see Section 6.

o Inspection should be performed any time a
malfunction is experienced or suspected.
o Receipts for all emission control system
services should be retained to demonstrate
compliance with conditions of the emissions
system warranty.
o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000
km), continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
o For severe usage maintenance requirements, see page 5-6 of this section.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services
to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
F030B02JM-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

No.

DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

7.5

15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

KILOMETERS X 1000

96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240

MONTHS

96 102 108 114 120

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
1

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSES

CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

AIR FILTER-CANISTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED) - 2.0L
SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED) - 2.7L

VALVE CLEARANCE (2.0L only)

I
I

R
I

R
R

R: 100.000 miles / 120 months
I

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5
5

F030C02JM-AAT

R : Replace
No.

I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

7.5

22.5

37.5

52.5

67.5

82.5

97.5

105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

KILOMETERS X 1000

108

120

132

144

156

168

180

192

204

216

228

240

MONTHS

102

108

114

120

GENERAL ITEMS
1

DRIVE BELT 2.0 DOHC (ALT, W/PUMP)
2.7 V6 (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

See Note (1)

COOLANT

TIMING BELT (WHEN REPLACE TIMING BELT AND INSPECT
WATER PUMP : 2.7L)
(See Note (2)- 2.0 L)

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

I
I

9
10

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM
BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

14
15

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD)

17
18

REAR AXLE OIL (4WD)
PROPELLAR SHAFT CLEAN, BOLT RETIGHTEN (4WD)

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

I
I

I
I
See Note (3)

See Note (4)

Note : (1) When replace drive belt and inspect water pump.
(2) For every 48 months or 37,200 miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first : "I"
For every 72 months or 56,000 miles (90,000 km), whichever occurs first : "R"
(3) Inspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)and replace every 62,000 miles (100,000 km).
(4) lnspect every 25,000 miles (40,000 km)
(5) For every 12 months or 12,500 miles (20,000 km) whichever occurs first :"R"

I
I
See Note (5)

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
F040A02JM-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate
maintenance intervals.
R : Replace

I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
TIMING BELT
(WHEN REPLA CE TIMING BELT and INSPECT WATER PUMP : 2.7L)
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
TRANSFER CASE OIL (4WD) *1
REAR AXLE OIL (4WD) *1

MAINTENANCE
OPERATION

MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS

DRIVING
CONDITION

A, B, C, F, G, H, I, K

R
R
I

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS
INSPECT EVERY 20,000MILES (32,200 KM)
REPLACE EVERY 40,000MILES (64,400 KM)
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

C, D, G, H

I
I
R
R
R
R
R

MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM)
EVERY 50,000 MILES (80,000 KM)

C, D, E, F, G
C, E, F
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
A, C, E, F, G, H, I
C, E,
C, E, G, I
C, E, G, I

I/R

C, D, F, G
C, E
B, H
C, D, G, H

*1. Transfer case Oil ended Rear Axle Oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatly driving short distance of less than 5miles(8km) in normal tempera
ture or less than 10miles(16km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very
cold weather

EFGHI JK-

Driving in sandy areas
Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F(32°C)
Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
Driving over 100 MPH(170 Km/h)
Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
F060A01A-AAT

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are
required.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the
vehicle may be driven, damage the emission
system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in
the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement
more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine for
several minutes, and check for leaks at the
connections. Fuel filters should be installed by
trained technicians.

F060B01A-AAT

F060F01O-AAT

o Drive Belts

o Vacuum Hoses

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,
cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and
replace if necessary. Drive belts should be
checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of
heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,
and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.
Particular attention should be paid to examine
those hose surfaces nearest to high heat
sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that the
hoses do not come in contact with any heat
source, sharp edges or moving component
which might cause heat damage or mechanical
wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as
clamps and couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses
should be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have a trained
technician replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
F065F01O-AAT

F060H01A-AAT

F070D01A-AAT

o Crankcase Ventilation Hose

o Air Cleaner Filter

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the surface of hose for evidence of heat
and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examine that
hose surface nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hose
does not come in contact with any heat source,
sharp edges or moving component which might
cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hose should be
replaced immediately if there is any evidence of
deterioration or damage.

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to
the maintenance schedule.

F060G01A-AAT

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of the
correct heat range.

NOTE:
If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks
before adding oil. Do not overfill.
F070E04A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter
F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt
Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for
damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately.

F070C01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

o Coolant

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be
inspected at those intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.

The coolant should be changed at the intervals
specified in the maintenance schedule.

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range of
the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are
at normal operating temperature. Check the
automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine
running and the transaxle in neutral, with the
parking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAI
GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK
ATF SP III or other brands approved by Hyundai
Motor Co., when adding or changing fluid. Using
the wrong ATF may result in damage to the
ATM.
F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation, chafing,
cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace
any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5
9

F070G02A-AAT

F070K01A-AAT

F070N01A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and
"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use
only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3
or DOT 4.

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and
hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Start the engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or
replace parts as necessary.

Check the power steering pump and hoses for
leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or
leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070H01O-AAT

F070L01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Discs and Linings/
Parking Brake

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the rear brake discs and linings for
scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,
and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake
system including the parking brake lever and
cables. For detailed service procedures, refer
to the Shop Manual.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for
run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified
torque.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for
cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any
damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/
Lower Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check
for excessive free-play in the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check
the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,
cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged
parts.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant
shop manual if necessary.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2
General Checks ............................................................ 6-4
Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5
Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-6
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8
Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-10
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11
Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-13
Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-14
Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-15
Checking the Clutch Fluid ........................................... 6-16
Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-17
Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-18
Checking the Free-play ............................................... 6-19
Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-21
Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-21
Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-23
Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-24
Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-26
Bulb Wattage ............................................................... 6-34
Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-35

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01JM-GAT

(2.7 Gasoline)

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects carefully
so that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010A01JM

1.
2.
3.
4.

Power steering fluid reservoir
Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Fuse and Relay box

5.
6.
7.
8.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
Coolant reservoir cap
Engine oil filler cap

9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)
10. Radiator cap
11. Battery

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
3

G010B01JM-AAT

(2.0 Gasoline)

CAUTION:

When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects carefully
so that the plastic cover of the
engine is not damaged.

G010B01JM

1.
2.
3.
4.

Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake & Clutch fluid reservoir
Air cleaner

5.
6.
7.
8.

Fuse and Relay box
Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil level dipstick
Coolant reservoir cap

9. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
(Vehicle with Automatic Transaxle)
10. Radiator cap
11. Battery

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01A-AAT

G020B01A-AAT

G020C01A-AAT

Engine Compartment

Vehicle Exterior

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked regularly:

The following should be checked monthly:

The following should be checked each time
when the vehicle is driven:

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Engine oil level and condition
Transaxle fluid level and condition
Brake fluid level
Clutch fluid level
Engine coolant level
Windshield washer fluid level
Accessory drive belt condition
Engine coolant hose condition
Fluid leaks (on or below components)
Power steering fluid level
Battery condition
Air filter condition

Overall appearance and condition
Wheel condition and wheel nut torque
Exhaust system condition
Light condition and operation
Windshield glass condition
Wiper blade condition
Paint condition and body corrosion
Fluid leaks
Door and hood lock condition
Tire pressure and condition
(including spare tire)

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Lights operation
Windshield wiper operation
Horn operation
Defroster, heating system operation (and air
conditioning, if installed)
Steering operation and condition
Mirror condition and operation
Turn signal operation
Accelerator pedal operation
Brake operation, including parking brake
Manual transaxle operation, including clutch
operation
Automatic transaxle operation, including
"Park" mechanism operation
Seat control condition and operation
Seat belt condition and operation
Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operate
correctly or appears to be functioning correctly,
inspect it carefully and seek assistance from
your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

NOTE:

Engine oil is essential to the performance and
service of the engine. It is suggested that you
check the oil level at least once a week in normal
use and more often if you are on a trip or driving
in severe conditions.

o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferred
regardless of regional option and engine variation.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is
not available, secondary recommended
engine oil for corresponding temperature range can be used.

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level
DOHC

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

G030C01JM

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to
the normal operating temperature and be sure
your car is parked on level ground. Turn the
engine off.

G030B01JM-U

The engine oil quality should meet the following
classification.
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

Wait five minutes , then remove the dipstick,
wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw
it again. Then note the highest level the oil has
reached on the dipstick. It should be between
the upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW") range.

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when checking the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

6
G030D01JM-AAT

G040A01JM-AAT

Adding Oil
DOHC

DOHC

WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.

G040A01GK
G030D01JM

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,
add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not
overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.
The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is
equal to about 1 quart of oil.

The engine oil and filter should be changed at
those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven
in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
The procedure for changing the oil and filter is
as follows:
1. Park the car on level ground and set the
parking brake. Start the engine and let it
warm up until the needle on the coolant
temperature gauge moves above the lowest
mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear
selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse
gear (manual transaxle).

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
7

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
filler cap.
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the
drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with
a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a
drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it
drains out, then remove the drain plug.

WARNING:

Be very careful when draining the engine oil
as it may be hot enough to burn you!
4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace
the drain plug using a new washer and
retighten by turning it clockwise.
Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:
3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.7L)
4.0 ~ 4.5 kgf.m (2.0L)
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper
size. A certain amount of oil will come out
when you remove the filter. So be sure to
have your drain pan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the
instructions on the carton or on the filter itself.
Do not over-tighten. (Tightening torque :
1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m) Be sure that the mounting
surface on the engine is clean and that the
old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate
the new gasket on the filter with clean engine
oil before installation.
7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.
8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended
engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:

Slowly pour the recommended oil using by
a funnel. Do not overfill! Engine damage
may occur if overfilled.
9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil
is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:
Always dispose of used engine oil in an
environmentally acceptable manner. It is
suggested that it be placed in a sealed
container and taken to a service station for
reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the
ground or put it in with the household
trash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Used engine oil may cause irritation or
cancer of the skin if left in contact with the
skin for prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap and warm
water as soon as possible after handling
used oil.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
8

CHECKING AND CHANGING THE
ENGINE COOLANT
G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:

Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the
engine coolant is under pressure and may
erupt through the opening if the cap is
removed. You could be seriously burned if
you do not observe this precaution. Do not
remove the radiator cap until the radiator is
cool to the touch.

G050B01A-AAT

G050C01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

To Check the Coolant Level

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a
50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should
be compatible with aluminum engine parts.
Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should
not be used. The cooling system must be
maintained with the correct concentration and
type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and
corrosion. Never allow the concentration of
antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below
the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system
may result. For proper concentration when
adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to
the following table.
G050C01JM

Ambient
Engine Coolant concentration
temperature
Antifreeze
Water
°F (°C)
solution
65%
5 (-15)
35%
60%
-13 (-25)
40%
50%
-31 (-35)
50%
40%
-49 (-45)
60%

The coolant level can be seen on the side of the
plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the coolant should be between the "L" and "F" lines on
the reservoir when the engine is cool. If the level
is below the "L" mark, add engine coolant to
bring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,
inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid
level frequently. If the level drops again, visit
your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and
diagnosis of the reason.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
9

G050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine Coolant
The engine coolant should be changed at those
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:

Engine coolant can damage the finish of
your car. If you spill engine coolant on the
car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.
1. Park the car on level ground, set the parking brake and remove the radiator cap when
cool.

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down on it, until it stops. This
relieves any pressure remaining in the cooling system. And remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning counterclockwise.
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.
Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all
the engine coolant to drain from the cooling
system, then securely close the drain cock.
4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the
cooling system in your car. Then, following
the manufacturer's directions on the engine
coolant container, add the appropriate quantity of coolant to the radiator.
5. Fill the radiator with clean demineralized or
distilled water. Continue to add clean demineralized or distilled water in small quantities
until the fluid level stays up in the radiator
neck.

G050D01JM

6. Start the engine, top off the radiator with
water and then add coolant to the reservoir
until the level is between "L" and "F".
7. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and
check to be sure the drain cocks are fully
closed and not leaking.

HJM5034

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the coolant fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
10

SPARK PLUGS
G060B01JM-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

Recommended Spark Plugs:
REMARK

The spark plugs should be changed at the
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5 or whenever engine
performance indicates they should be changed.
Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug performance include engine misfiring under load, loss
of fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. When
spark plugs are replaced, always use spark
plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use of
other spark plugs can result in loss of performance, radio interference or engine damage.

G060C01JM-AAT

Changing the Spark Plugs

TYPE

2.7
IFR5G-11 (NGK)
(Iridium Coated)
2.0L
(Platinum Coated)

PFR5N-11(NGK)
RC10YPB4 (CHAMPION)

NOTE:
o When replacing the spark plug, genuine
Hyundai replacement parts are recommended.
o It is recommended that the spark plug
should be changed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. (2.7 L)
o Do not clean or regap spark plugs.

G060C01JM

You will find it easier to change spark plugs if the
engine is cold. Always change one spark plug
at a time. This helps avoid getting the wires
mixed up.
1. Remove the center cover (2.0L) on the
engine rocker cover.
2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that has
accumulated around the base of the spark
plug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when the
spark plug is removed.
3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straight
up on the insulated connector, not the cable.
Pulling on the cable may damage the carbon
core conductor.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER
FILTER
6. To install the new spark plug, guide the
socket down over the spark plug, being
careful not to damage the ceramic insulator.

G070A01E-AAT

G060C02JM
HJM5038

G060C03JM

WARNING:

It is recommended that the engine be cool
or cold when changing the spark plugs. If
the engine is hot, you could burn yourself
on the insulated connector, the spark plug
or the engine itself.
4. When preparing to remove the old spark
plug, guide the socket down over the spark
plug, being careful not to damage the ceramic insulator.
5. To remove the old spark plug, turn the
wrench handle in a counterclockwise direction.

NOTE:
Spark plugs should be tightened to specification. Over-tightening can damage the
threads in the aluminum cylinder head.
Also, leaving them too loose can cause the
spark plug to get very hot and possibly
result in damage to the engine.
7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulated
connector directly down onto the electrode.
Check to be sure it has snapped into place
and can't fall off.

To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the
cover. When this is done, the cover can be lifted
off, the old filter removed and the new filter put
in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement
Parts are recommended.

CAUTION:

o Operating your vehicle without a proper
air filter in place can result in excessive
engine wear.
o When removing the air cleaner filter, be
careful that dust or dirt does not enter
the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner filter.

6
11

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
12

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR

G080A02A-AAT

G090A01JM-AAT

CAUTION:

o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washer system
because it will damage the car's finish.
o The washer should not be operated if the
washer reservoir is empty. This can damage the washer fluid pump.

HJM5032

The wiper blades should be carefully inspected
from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. To clean
the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge
or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.
If the wipers continue to streak or smear the
glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai replacement parts or their equivalent.

CAUTION:

o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.
This can result in more rapid wear of the
wiper blades and may scratch the glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.

G090A01JM

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the
front and rear washer systems.
A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill
the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be
checked more frequently during inclement
weather or whenever the washer system is in
more frequent use.
The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.59
U.S. quarts (3.4 Liters).

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL
(MANUAL)

13
Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

G100A02JM-AAT

WARNING:

It is always better to check the transaxle oil
level when the engine is cool or cold. If the
engine is hot, you should exercise great
caution to avoid burning yourself on hot
engine or exhaust parts.

Filler plug

Drain plug
G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid
Level
HJM5009

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle
should be checked at those intervals specified
in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section
5.

Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF
75W/85 (API GL-4) or EQUIVALENT in the
manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity
The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.2
U.S. quarts (2.1 liters).

G100B01L

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosen
the oil filler plug by turning it counterclockwise and remove it with your fingers.
2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel inside
the hole. The oil level should be at its bottom
edge. If it is not, check for leaks before
adding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring the
oil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches the
proper level. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in with
your fingers and then tighten securely with
the wrench.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
14

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE
FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should
be checked at those intervals specified in the
vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:
Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red
color. As driving distance increases, the
fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is
a normal condition and you should not
judge the need to replace based upon the
changing color.
You must replace the automatic transaxle
fluid in accordance with intervals specified
in the vehicle maintenance schedule in
section 5.

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level
CAUTION:

Use of aftermarket ATF additives may cause
damage to the automatic transaxle. Only
use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., If
you are having your vehicle serviced at a
facility other than a Hyundai dealer, verify
ATF is used for your vehicle.

G110C01JM-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity
HJM3018

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is
8.2 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters).

G110B04A-AAT

Recommended Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially
designed to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINE
ATF SP III DIAMOND ATF SP-III SK ATF SP III
or other brands approved by Hundai Motor Co,.
Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not
covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.

WARNING:

The transaxle fluid level should be checked
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature. This means that the engine,
radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot
so you should exercise great care not to
burn yourself during this procedure.

Park the car on level ground with the parking
brake engaged. When the transaxle fluid level
is checked, the transaxle fluid should be at
normal operating temperature and the engine
idling.
While the engine is idling, apply the brakes and
move the gear selector lever from "P" to each
of its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and then
return to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:
1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,
long hair and clothing clear of any moving
parts.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE BRAKES
G120A01A-AAT

!
Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

HJM5044

HJM5011

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,
reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, then
remove it again. Now check the fluid level on
the dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" range
on the dipstick.
3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnel
to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick
tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.
Do not overfill.

CAUTION:

Because brakes are essential to the safe
operation of the car, it is suggested that
they be checked and inspected by your
Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be
checked and inspected for wear at those
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level
WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan, so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It
can damage your vision if it gets into your
eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's
paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.

6
15

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID

16
G120C02A-AAT

G120E02A-AAT

G130A01A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Adding Brake Fluid

To Check the Clutch Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking
system. Follow the instructions printed on the
container.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

WARNING:

Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage
your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a
sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can
or reservoir to remain open any longer than
required. This will prevent entry of dirt and
moisture which can damage the brake system and cause improper operation.
To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt then
unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the
recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not
overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reservoir and tighten.

HJM5007

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should
be checked periodically. The level should be
between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the
"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to
"MAX". Do not overfill.

HJM5007

The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder
should be checked when performing other under hood services. The system should be
checked for leakage at the same time. Check
to make certain that the clutch fluid level is
always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level
markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required.
Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system
which should be inspected and repaired immediately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G130B02A-AAT

G140A01A-AAT

G140C01A-AAT

To Replace the Fluid

Keeping the Condenser Clean

Lubrication

Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT
3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. The
reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid
contamination from foreign matter or moisture.

The air conditioning condenser (and engine
radiator) should be checked periodically for
accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.
These can interfere with maximum cooling efficiency. When removing such accumulations,
brush or hose them away carefully to avoid
bending the cooling fans.

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the
system, the air conditioning should be run for at
least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly
important during cool weather when the air
conditioning system is not otherwise in use.

NOTE:
Do not allow any other liquids to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.

G140D02A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

G140B01A-AAT

WARNING:

Use caution when handling brake fluid. It
can damage your vision if you get it in your
eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's
paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.

Checking the Air Conditioning Operation
1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle for
several minutes with the air conditioning set
at the maximum cold setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is
not cold, have the air conditioning system
inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

DOHC CVVT
Water Pump Pulley

V6
Power steering
Auto
tensioner

0.2~0.24 in.
(5~6 mm)

Alternator

CAUTION:

Running the air conditioning system for
extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor.

Alternator Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley

COMP
Eng.pulley
G190A01GK

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
CHANGING THE AIR
CONDITIONER FILTER

18
When the air conditioning is being used regularly, the compressor drive belt tension should
be checked at least once a month with the
engine turned off.
To check the drive belt tension, press down on
the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft
and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your
finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt
anymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is too
loose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

B145A02JM-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)
(If Installed)
The air conditioner filter is located in front of the
evaporator unit behind the glove box.
It helps to decrease the amount of pollutants
entering the car.

HJM2136

2. Lower the glove box down completely by
pushing the both sides of the glove box
inward.

HJM2133

1. Open the glove box and remove the support
strap through the hole.

HJM2134

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY
3. Remove the air conditioner filter cover by
pressing both side's clips.

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

B145A01JM

1.18 in.
(30 mm)
G150A01JM

HJM2135

4. Remove the air conditioner filter by lifting it.
5. Installation is the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:

Be sure to install the air conditioner filter in
the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise,
noise or filter damage may result.

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop the
car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and
gently move the steering wheel back and forth.
Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive
to changes in resistance that mark the limits of
the free-play. If the free-play is greater than
specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai
dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
CLEARANCE

20
G160A01A-AAT

G170A01A-AAT

CLUTCH PEDAL FREE PLAY

BRAKE PEDAL FREE PLAY

0.24 ~ 0.51 in.
(6 ~ 13 mm)

G180A01A-AAT

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.
(3 ~ 8 mm)

2.95 in. (75 mm)

G180A01L
G160A01HR

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutch
pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This
is the clutch pedal free-play. The free-play
should be within the limits specified in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected by your
Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if
necessary.

G160A01HR

With the engine off, press down on the brake
pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the
brake booster.
Then, using your hand, press down slowly on
the brake pedal until you feel a change in
resistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.
The free-play should be within the limits specified in the illustration above. If it is not, have it
inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted
or repaired if necessary.

You need a helper to check the brake pedal
clearance. With the engine running, have your
helper press down on the brake pedal several
times and then hold it down with a force of about
110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the
brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the
floor mat.
If the brake pedal clearance is not within the
limits specified in the illustration, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted
or repaired if necessary.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

CHECKING AND REPLACING
FUSES

G190A01A-AAT

G200A03A-AAT

DOHC CVVT
Water Pump Pulley

Replacing a Fusible Link

Auto
tensioner
0.2~0.24 in.
(5~6 mm)

OpenReplace

Good

G200B01JM-AAT

Alternator
Alternator Pulley
Crankshaft Pulley

CAUTION:

When replacing a fusible link, never use
anything but a new fusible link with the
same or lower amperage rating. Never use
a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.
This could result in serious damage and
create a fire hazard.

Power steering

Replacing Accessory Fuses

COMP
Eng.pulley
G190A01GK

Drive belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the
same time, belts should be examined for cracks,
wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration
and replaced if necessary.
Belt routing should also be checked to be sure
there is no interference between the belts and
other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,
the new belt should be adjusted again after two
or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from
initial stretching after use.

G200A01JM

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from
the battery are ever overloaded, thus preventing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This
could be caused by a short in the system
drawing too much current.) If this ever happens,
have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,
repair the system and replace the fusible link.
The fusible links are located in a relay box in the
engine compartement for easy inspection.
HJM4002

The fuse box for the lights and other electrical
accessories will be found on the left side of
crash pad. Inside the box you will find a list
showing the circuits protected by each fuse.
If any of your car's lights or other electrical

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
22
accessories stop working, a blown (open) fuse
could be the reason. If the fuse has opened, you
will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has
melted through. If you suspect a blown fuse,
follow this procedure:
1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.
2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.
Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you
(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the
fuse box to simplify this operation).
3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you
find one that appears to have opened.
4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new

fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse
should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse
clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.
If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be
able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower
rating from an accessory you can temporarily get along without (the radio or cigarette
lighter, for example). Always remember to
replace the borrowed fuse.

CAUTION:

An open fuse indicates that there is a problem in the electrical circuit. If you replace a
fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory
is turned on, the problem is serious and
should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for
diagnosis and repair. Never replace a fuse
with anything except a fuse with the same
or a lower amperage rating. A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and create a
fire hazard.

NOTE:
See page 6-35 for the fuse panel descriptions.

Good

Open-Replace
G200B02L

G200B01JM

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

CHECKING THE BATTERY

23
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the
affected areas with water for at least 15
minutes and then seek medical assistance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your
eyes with water and get medical assistance
as soon as possible. While you are being
driven to get medical assistance, continue to
rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft
cloth saturated with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large
quantity of water or milk followed by milk of
magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable
oil. Get medical assistance as soon as
possible.

G210A01A-AAT

HJM5008

WARNING:

Batteries can be dangerous! When working
with batteries, carefully observe the following precautions to avoid serious injuries.
The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution
of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly
corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or
the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,
immediately do the following:

While batteries are being charged (either by a
battery charger or by the vehicle's generator),
they produce explosive gases. Always observe these warnings to prevent injuries from
occurring:
o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated
area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in
the area.
o Keep children away from the area.

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corrosion around the battery posts or terminals
should be removed using a solution of household baking soda and warm water. After the
battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light
coating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer. Wash hands after handling.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
24

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING
FANS
G220A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
G220B01A-AAT

G230A03A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may sometimes
operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan, so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan blade.
As the engine coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.

The engine cooling fan should come on automatically if the engine coolant temperature is
high.

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan
The condenser cooling fan should come on
automatically whenever the air conditioning is in
operation.

G230A01JM

The power steering fluid level should be checked
regularly. To check the power steering fluid
level, be sure the engine is "OFF", then check
to make certain that the power steering fluid
level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level
markings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:
Grinding noise from the power steering
pump may be heard immediately after the
engine is started in extremely cold conditions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops during
warm up, there is no abnormal function in
the system. It is due to a power steering
fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Recommended Fluid
Use PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:
Do not start the engine when the power
steering oil reservoir is empty.
G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES
It is suggested that you check the power steering hose connections for fluid leakage at those
intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.
The power steering hoses should be replaced
if there is severe surface cracking, pulling,
scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose
could cause premature failure.
G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR HYUNDAI
If you desire additional information about maintaining and servicing your Hyundai, you may
purchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundai
dealer's parts department. This is the same
manual used by dealership technicians and
while it is highly technical it can be useful in
obtaining a better understanding of your car and
how it works.

G290A02O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, make
sure of the following.
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press
the front bumper & rear bumper down several times.
Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)
from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for
full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and
spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driver
or equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.
4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the
headlights (Low beam).
5. Open the hood.

Vertical
aiming
Horizontal
aiming

G290A01JM

6. Draw a vertical line (through the center of
each headlight beam pattern) and a horizontal line (through the center of each headlight
beam pattern) on the aiming screen.
And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21
mm) under the horizontal line.
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the
parallel line with a phillips screwdriver VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:

Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by
an authorized Hyundai dealer.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

26
G290B01JM-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight Assembly
Replacement
Vertical
line

30 mm
Horizontal line

"P"
Cut-off
line
L

Ground line

G290B01B

If the vehicle has had front body repair and the
headlight assembly has been replaced, the
headlight aiming should be checked using an
aiming chart as shown in the illustration. Turn on
the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)
1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is
parallel to center line of the body and is
aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center
of headlights.

SPECIFICATION:
"H";
Horizontal center line of headlights from
ground: 35.6 in.(904 mm)
"W";
Distance between each headlight center:
53.4 in.(1,356 mm)
"L";
Distance between the headlights and the
wall that the lights are tested against:
118 in. (3,000 mm).

G260A02A-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be sure
the switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
The next paragraph shows how to reach the
light bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to
replace the burned-out bulb with one of the
same number and wattage rating.
See page 6-34 for the wattage description.

CAUTION:

Keep the lamps out of contact with petroleum products, such as oil, gasoline, etc.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
27

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwise
and remove it.

G270A02O-AAT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,
avoid touching the glass.

HJM5013

5. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight.

HJM5017

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight.
HJM5012

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,
remove the headlight assembly mounting
bolts.

HJM5016

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
28
G270B01JM-AAT

Rear Combination Light

G270A03O

HJM5018

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlight
bulb.
9. Remove the protective cap from the replacement bulb and install the new bulb by
matching the plastic base with the headlight
hole. Reattach the bulb spring and reconnect the connector.
10.Use the protective cap and carton to promptly dispose of the old bulb.
11.Check for proper headlight aim.
12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb,
remove from the bulb holder and install the
new bulb. Do not touch the glass of the new
bulb.

HJM5020

WARNING:

This halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye
protection when servicing the bulb. Protect
the bulb against abrasions or scratches
and against liquids when lighted. Turn the
bulb on only when installing in a headlight.
Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.
Keep the bulb out of the reach of children
and dispose of the used bulb with care.

HJM5021

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
29

1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the mounting screws as shown
with a phillips screwdriver.

G270I02JM-GAT

Front fog Light (If installed)

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

HJM5049

HJM5047
HJM5022

3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/
tail light, turn signal light, back-up light, side
mark light), take it out from the bulb holder by
turning it counterclockwise.

3. Disconnect the power cord.

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screw
driver.
2. Remove the bolts with a wrench.

(1) Stop/Tail light
(2) Turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
4. Install the new bulb.
HJM5050

4. Replace to the new bulb.
HJM5048

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
30
G270C02TB-GAT

G270C02JM-AAT

Luggage Compartment Light
(If Installed)

Cargo Light

G270C02JM

2. Disconnect the power cord.

HJM5023

1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screwdriver.

G270C01JM

1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screw
driver.

HTB284

3. Replace to the new bulb.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
31

G270E01O-AAT

Front Side Marker Light

HJM5024

3. Replace with a new bulb.

G270E02HR

2. Disconnect the connector.
G270E01JM

1. Remove the cover with a phillips screwdriver.

G270E03HR

3. Replace with a new bulb.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
32
G270G01O-AAT

G270H01O-AAT

Interior Light

Glove Box Illuminated Light

HJM5026

HJM5025

1. Remove the cover with a flat blade screwdriver.

2. Replace with a new bulb.
HJM5045

1. Open the glove box.
2. Remove the cover with a flat blade screwdriver.

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
33

HJM5039

3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Replace with a new bulb.

HTB284

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
34

BULB WATTAGE
G280A01JM-AAT

G280A01JM-U

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Part Name
Front Postion Light
Glove Box Illuminated Light
Head Light (Low/High)
Map Light
Interior Light
Room Light
Front Fog Light (If installed)
Turn Signal Light
Side Marker
Front Door Edge Warning Light (If installed)

Wattage
5
10
55/60
10
10
27
21
5
5

No.
9 Cargo Light

Part Name

High Mounted Rear Stop Light (LED Type)

11
12
13
14
15

Luggage Compartment Light
Turn Signal Light
Back-up Light
License Plate Light
Stop/Tail Light

Wattage
10
A TYPE 2.4
B TYPE
5
10
21
21
5
21/5

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01JM-GAT

Engine Compartment
FUSE
RATING
30A
IGN
30A
ECU
50A
BATT #1
50A
FUSIBLE
C/FAN
30A
LINK
ABS #1
40A
ABS #2
30A
BLOWER
30A
BATT #2
15A
INJ
10A
SNSR
15A
DRL
15A
F/FOG
FUSE
15A
HORN
15A
A/CON
15A
H/LP (HI)
15A
H/LP (LOW)
DESCRIPTION

NOTE:

PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Start relay, Ignition switch
Engine control, Fuel pump , A/C, Generator, ATM
Ignition switch, Power connector
Cooling fan
ABS, ESP
ABS, ESP
Blower
Ignition switch, Power connector
Injector
Cooling fan, Stop lamp switch, Oxygen sensor, ECM/PCM
DRL
Front fog lamp
Horn, Siren
A/C
Head lamp (HIGH)
Head lamp (LOW)

G200C01JM

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the
fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
36
G200E01JM-AAT

Inner Panel

G200E01JM

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6
37

FUSE
RATING
P/WDW-LH
30A
P/WDW-RH
30A
TAIL RH
10A
RR HTR
30A
A/BAG
15A
CLUSTER
10A
TAIL LH
10A
AUDIO
10A
C/LIGHTER
20A
& P/OUTLET
SPARE
15A
RR FOG
10A
HTD MIRR
10A
AUDIO
10A
IG COIL
20A
IMMO
10A
P/OUTLET
15A
FUSE

S/HTR
A/CON SW
START

10A
20A
10A
10A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Left power window
Right power window
Right rear combination lamp, Glove box lllumination
Rear defogger
SRS control
Instrument cluster, ETACM/TACM
Left head lamp, Left rear combination lamp, License lamp
Digital clock, Audio, Power outside mirror folding module, Power outside mirror & mirror folding switch
Cigarette lighter
(SPARE)
Rear fog lamp
Left/Right power outsider mirror & mirror folding motor, Rear defogger switch
Audio
Ignition coil (2.7 L)
Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)
Rear power outlet
(Not used)
Seat warmer
A/C control module (Manual A/C)
Theft alarm relay, Transaxle range switch, lgnition lock switch

6 DO-IT-YOURSELFMAINTENANCE
38

FUSE

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

RATING

IG-SW

30A

Ignition switch

ROOM LP

10A

Room lamp, A/C control module, Digital clock, ETACM/TACM Key remind switch

AMP
T/SIG

20A

Audio
Hazard switch, Auto light & Photo sensor, Transaxle range switch

A/BAG IND

10A
10A

RR WIPER

15A

A/CON

10A

Safety relay
Sunroof controller, A/C control module, Blower relay, ETACM/TACM

IGN

10A

PTC heater relay, Fuel filter heater relay, DRL CONTROL MODULE, head LAMP RELAY

HAZARD
S/ROOF

10A

Hazard switch, Hazard relay, Immobilizer control module (2.7 L)
Sunroof, Door lock/unlock relay

STOP

20A
15A

H/FREE

10A

Stop lamp switch, Power outside mirror folding module
(Not used)

Instrument cluster

ECU

10A

Cruise control, Stop lamp, TCS, ESP, 4WD ECM, ECM, PCM, TCM, Vehicle speed sensor

FF WIPER

20A

Front wiper, Multifunction switch

4WD
DEICER

20A

4WD/ECM
Windshield defogger

TCU

15A
10A

ABS

10A

TCM (2.7 L)
G-Sensor, ESP, ABS

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2
Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
H010A02O-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission
control system to meet all requirements of the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or California Air Resources Board.
There are three emission control systems which
are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of the
emission control systems, it is recommended
that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this
manual.
Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance
Test (V6 Vehicle with Traction Control System)
o To prevent the vehicle from misfiring
during dynamometer testing, disconnect the ABS connector in the engine
compartment. (2.7 V6 only)
o For more information, see shop manual
(Wheel Speed Sensor).
o After dynamometer testing is completed,
erase the ABS/TCS DTC (Diagnotic
Trouble Code) with a GST (Generic Scan
Tool) or Hi-Scan Pro.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation system is
employed to prevent air pollution caused by
blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies filtered air to the
crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside
the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the PCV valve
and into the induction system.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) System
The Evaporative Emission Control System is
designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow the
vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a
canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)

Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are
absorbed and stored in the canister. When the
engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the induction system
through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled
by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the
engine coolant temperature is low during idling,
the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not
taken into the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to
introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System
The Exhaust Emission Control System is a
highly effective system which controls exhaust
emissions while maintaining good vehicle
performace.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

Catalytic Converter

H020A01JM

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a monolith type three-way catalytic converter to reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons and
nitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.
Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic
converter cause it to operate at a very high
temperature. The introduction of large amounts
of unburned gasoline into the exhaust may
cause the catalytic converter to overheat and
create a fire hazard. This risk may be reduced
by observing the following:

WARNING:

o Use unleaded fuel only.
o Maintain the engine in good operating
condition. Extremely high catalytic converter temperatures can result from improper operation of the electrical, ignition or multiport electronic fuel injection.
o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is
hard to start, have your Hyundai dealer
inspect and repair the problem as soon
as possible.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
Running out of gasoline may cause the
engine to misfire and result in damage to
the catalytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for periods
longer than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be pushed or
pulled to get started. This may cause the
catalytic converter to overheat and create a fire hazard.
o Do not touch the catalytic converter or
any other part of the exhaust system
while the catalytic converter is hot. Shut
off the engine, wait for at least one hour
before touching the catalytic converter
or any other part of the exhaust system.

WARNING:
o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is
your best source of assistance.
o Do not stop your Hyundai over any combustible material such as grass, paper,
leaves or rags. These materials might
contact the hot catalytic converter and a
fire might result.

CONSUMER INFORMATION

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2
Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2
Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2
Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3
Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-4
Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-6
Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-8
Tire Chains .................................................................... 8-9
Tire Rotation .................................................................. 8-9
Tire Balancing ............................................................... 8-9
Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-10
When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-10
Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-11
Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-11
Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-11
Consumer Information ................................................. 8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-14

8
8

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
2

ENGINE NUMBER

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the
number used in registering your car and in all
legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It
can be found in three different places on your
car:

I010A02JM-AAT

I010B01A-AAT

DOHC (I4)

1. Lower side of the front passenger seat under
the carpet.
2. On the left top side of the instrument panel
where it can be seen by looking down through
the windshield.
3. On the lower side of the left center pillar outer
panel.
I010A03JM

I010B01GK

The engine number is stamped on the engine
block as shown in the drawing.

I010A02JM

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TIRES

8
3

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundai
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
If you ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to obtain service, see the tire manufacture's booklet
included with your vehicle's Owner's
Manual Literature Kit.

Tire label located on the driver's side of
the center pillar outer panel gives the
cold tire pressures recommended for
your vehicle with the original tire size,
the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

WARNING:
o Lower-than-recommended tire
pressures cause uneven tread
wear, poor handling, poor fuel
economy or tire failure.
o Higher-than-recommended tire
pressures can cause poor handling, uneven tread wear or tire
failure.

I030A01JM-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRESSURES

I030A01JM

These pressures were chosen to provide the most satisfactory combination
of ride comfort, tire wear and stability
under normal conditions. Tire pressures
should be checked at least monthly.
Proper tire inflation pressures should
be maintained for these reasons:

HJM1032

CAUTION:
Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tires
are cold. (After the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours
or hasn't been driven more than
one mile (1.6 km) since starting
up.)

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
4

o Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
o Never overload your vehicle. Be
especially careful about overloading if you equip your vehicle with
a luggage rack.
o Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking

at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1
mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly
onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until
you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put
the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.

I030B01JM-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING
1
5, 6
7
4
3
2
1

I030B04JM

Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also
provides the tire identification number
(TIN) for safety standard certification.
The TIN can be used to identify the tire
in case of a recall.

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8
5

1. Manufacturer or Brand name
o Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size (example: P235/60R16 99T)
o The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. A
"T" is the designation for a temporary spare tire.
o Three-digit number (235): This number gives the width in millimeters
of the tire from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge.
o Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio,
gives the tire's ratio of height to
width.
o R: The "R" stands for radial.
o Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
o Two (or three) digit number (99):
This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can support.

o T: Speed Rating. The speed rating
denotes the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time. The ratings range
from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).
3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or
to the left or right of the Tire Iden
tification Number. Indicates tire is
in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's
identification mark
o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size
o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture

o Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 3105 means
the 31st week of 2005.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and
others. The letter "R" means radial
ply construction; the letter "D" means
diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter "B" means belted-bias
ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation pressure.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
6

6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 8-12.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside
the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that
is located between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from steel or
other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that hold
the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the plies are laid at alternate angles
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals
(kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of
a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number
(TIN), an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of
production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the rear axle.

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8
7

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side
of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to
the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a cold
tire may be inflated. The maximum air
pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed
to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68
kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of
a asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that faces outward when mounted
on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on passenger cars and some light duty
trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure and shown on the
tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between
the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire
and the road surface. The amount of
grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called "wear bars," that show
across the tread of a tire when only 2/32
inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards, a tire information system
that provides consumers with ratings
for a tire's traction, temperature and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
8

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number
of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated
cargo and luggage load
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory
weight, and normal occupant weight
and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure

I040B01JM-AAT

I040A01O-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

SNOW TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including
snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than all season tires an may be
more appropriate in some areas.

If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and have
the same load capacity as the original
tires. Snow tires should be installed on
all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires on
the tire label on the driver's side of the
center pillar , or up to the maximum
pressure shown on the tire sidewall
whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES
Hyundai specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance
is substantrally reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the
tire side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
Hyundai recommends the use of snow
tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8
9

I050A04A-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

I060A01O-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

CAUTION:
Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply
under any circumstances. This may
cause dangerous handling characteristics.

Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels. Be sure
that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do not
continue to use tire chains when they
are no longer needed.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

o
o

WARNING:
Drive at lower speeds when driving on roads covered with snow or
ice.
Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
plastic chains.
If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3 ~ 0.6
miles.

HEF-241

Tires should be rotated every 7,500
miles (12,000 km). If you notice that
tires are wearing unevenly between rotations, have the car checked by a
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be
corrected.
After rotating, adjust the tire pressures
and be sure to check wheel nut torque.

A tire that is out of balance may affect
handling and tire wear. The tires on your
Hyundai were balanced before the car
was delivered but may need balancing
again during the years you own the car.
Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, it should be rebalanced before
being reinstalled on the car.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
10
I080A01A-AAT

I090A02JM-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive
on worn tires, tires that are improperly
inflated or on slippery road surfaces.
Tires should be replaced when tread
wear indicators appear. To reduce the
possibility of losing control, slow down
whenever there is rain, snow or ice on
the road.

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

TWI indicator

HJM5031

The original tires on your car have tread
wear indicators . The location of tread
wear indicators is shown by the "TWI"
or " " marks, etc., The tread wear
indicators appear when the tread depth
is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be
replaced when these appear as a solid
bar across two or more grooves of the
tread. Always replace your tires with
those of the recommended size. If you
change wheels, the new wheel's rim
width and offset must meet Hyundai
specification.

WARNING:
o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous! Worn-out tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering control and traction. When
replacing tires, never mix radial
and bias ply tires on the same car.
If you replace radial tires with biasply tires, they must be installed in
sets of four.
o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's
dimensional specifications may
fit poorly and result in damage to
the vehicle, including broken
wheel studs.

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS
I090B01JM-AAT

I100A02E-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE
WARNING:

In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease tire
wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,
have your dealer check the wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This will
increase vehicle ride comfort and tire
life. Additionally, a tire shoud always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel.

HJM4007

Your Hyundai is delivered with the following:
Spare tire and wheel
Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar
Jack
I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL
A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from your
authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for professional technicians, but is simple enough for
most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
12

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI
VEHICLE

CONSUMER INFORMATION

I120A02A-AAT

I130A01A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited
Warranty.
o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner
only).
o Anti-Perforation Limited Warranty
o Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicle
o California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)
o Emission Performance Warranty Federal
vehicle
o Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

This consumer information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued by the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It
provides the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with information on uniform tire quality grading. Your
Hyundai dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.

NOTE:
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading
Department of Transportation quality
grades - All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal Safety Standards in addition to these grades. These
quality grades are molded on the
sidewall.
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8
13

Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.

WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Quality grades can be found on the tire
sidewall between the tread shoulder
and the maximum section width.
For example :
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

14
I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety
standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you
to read and follow all directions in this Owner's
Manual, particularly the information under the
headings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any
questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest Hyundai
Motor America Regional Office as listed below:
Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,
Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.
Hyundai Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,
Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Carolina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,
Texas.

Hyundai Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,
Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin.
Hyundai Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, New
Mexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,
Wyoming.
Hyundai Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151

I130C01A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If
NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department
of Transportation, Washington. D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2
Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

9
9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J010A01JM-AAT

J030A01JM-AAT

in. (mm)

MEASUREMENT
Overall Length

170 (4,325)

Overall Width

70 (1,795)

Overall Height (Unladen)

66 (1,680)

Wheel base

103 (2,630)

Wheel tread

Front

60 (1,540)

Rear

60 (1,540)

TIRE
Standard

215/65R16

Option

235/60R16

Spare

T155/90R16 (Temporary)

J040A01JM-GAT

ELECTRICAL
Battery

J020A01JM-AAT

MF 60 AH, MF 68 AH

Alternator

POWER STEERING
Type

Rack and pinion

Wheel free play

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

Rack stroke

5.5 in. (142 mm)

Oil pump type

Vane type

2.0L

90A (13.5V)

2.7L

120A (13.5V)

J050A01JM-AAT

BRAKE
Type

J060A01JM-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM
Engine

Fuel tank capacity

2.7L

17 us.gal (65L)

2.0L

15 us.gal (58L)

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Front brake type

Ventilated disc

Rear brake type

2WD

4WD
Parking brake

CBS (With ABS)

Drum type

ABS

Disc type

CBS, ABS

Disc type

Cable operated on rear wheel

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

J070A01JM-AAT

GASOLINE
ITEMS
2.0 DOHC

2.7 V6

Engine Type

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

Bore x Stroke

82 × 93.5

86.7 × 75.0

1,975

2,656

1-3-4-2

1-2-3-4-5-6

0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.(0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

Auto lash

0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.(0.25 ~ 0.31 mm )

Auto lash

0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.(0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)

Auto lash

0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.(0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)

Auto lash

Displacement (cc)
Firing order
Intake
Valve Clearance

For adjusting
Exhaust

(Cold engine : 20±5°C)

Intake
For checking
Exhaust

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

Spark plug gap
Idle speed (rpm)
Ignition timing

700 ± 100

650 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

BTDC 12° ± 5°

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4

LUBRICATION CHART
J080A02JM-AAT

Item
Engine Oil

Transaxle

Manual
Automatic

Transfer case
Rear Axle
Coolant
Power steering gear
Brakes and clutch fluid

Oil & Grease Standard
API SJ, SL or ABOVE,

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS SAE MTF SAE 75W/85 (API GL-4)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or
other brands approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
API GL-5, SAE 80W/90 (SHELL SPIRAX AX Equivalent)
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
PSF-3 TYPE FLUID
DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

Q'ty u.s.qts. (liter)
Drain and refill with oil filter
2.0 L : 4.23 (4.0)
2.7 L : 4.76 (4.5)
2.2 (2.1)
8.2 (7.8)
0.8 (0.8)
0.8 (0.75)
7.4 (7.0)
0.95 (0.9)
As required

INDEX

10
10

10 INDEX
2
A
Air bag ............................................................................................... 1-30
Air Cleaner Filter ............................................................................... 6-11
Air Conditioning
Care .............................................................................................. 6-17
Operation ............................................................................ 1-92, 6-17
Switch ........................................................................................... 1-92
Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-135
Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-60
Audio System
Cassette Tape player operation (J290) ................................... 1-126
Cassete tape player operation (M280) .................................... 1-112
Compact disc player operation (K260) .................................... 1-106
Compact disc player operation (M280) .................................... 1-115
CD changer operation (M280) .................................................. 1-119
Compact disc player / CD Auto changer operation (J290) ..... 1-128
Stereo radio operation (J290) ................................................... 1-123
Stereo radio operation (K260) .................................................. 1-103
Stereo radio operation (M280) .................................................. 1-109
B
Battery ..................................................................................... 2-20, 6-23
Brake
Anti-lock brake system ................................................................ 2-12
Traction control system (TCS) ................................................... 2-12
Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-15

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ................................................... 2-14
Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-13
Pedal clearance ........................................................................... 6-20
Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-20
Practices ...................................................................................... 2-18
Breaking-In your New Hyundai .......................................................... 1-3
Bulb Replacement ............................................................................. 6-26
C
Care of Cassette Tapes ................................................................ 1-133
Care of Disc ................................................................................... 1-133
Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-7
Child Restraint System ..................................................................... 1-23
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the
"Tether Anchorage" System ..................................................... 1-25
Securing the Child Restraint Seat with the "ISOFIX" System .... 1-26
Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-58
Clock ................................................................................................. 1-58
Clutch
Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-16
Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-20
Combination Light
Auto light ....................................................................................... 1-54
Headlight flasher .......................................................................... 1-53
Headlight switch ........................................................................... 1-53
High-beam switch ........................................................................ 1-53
Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-53
Parking light auto off ..................................................................... 1-53
Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-52

INDEX

10
3

Consumer Information ...................................................................... 8-12
Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-24
Corrosion protection
Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ....................................... 4-2
Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-3
Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-80
D
Defrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-91
Door
Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-7
Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4
Front door edge warning light ...................................................... 1-79
Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-59
Drive Belts ......................................................................................... 6-21
Driving
Driving for economy ..................................................................... 2-19
Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-20
Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-20
E
Emission Control System ................................................................... 7-2
Engine
Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-4
Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2
Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-8
Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-48
If the engine overheats .................................................................. 3-4

Number ........................................................................................... 8-2
Oil ................................................................................................... 6-5
Starting ........................................................................................... 2-5
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous .................................................. 2-2
F
4WD Lock System ............................................................................ 2-18
Fan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-85
Floor Mat Anchor .............................................................................. 1-78
Fog Light
Front ............................................................................................. 1-56
Front Seats
Adjustable front seats .................................................................. 1-12
Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-13
Adjusting seat forward and rearward .......................................... 1-12
Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-12
Fuel
Capacity ......................................................................................... 9-2
Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-48
Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2
Fuel Filler Lid
Remote release ............................................................................ 1-75
Full-time 4WD Operation .................................................................. 2-15
Fuses ................................................................................................ 6-21
Fuse panel description ...................................................................... 6-35
G
General Checks .................................................................................. 6-4
Glove Box .......................................................................................... 1-64

10 INDEX
4
H
Hazard Warning System .................................................................. 1-56
Heating and Cooling Control ............................................................. 1-84
Heating and Ventilation
Air flow control .............................................................................. 1-86
Air intake control switch ............................................................... 1-85
Bi-level heating ............................................................................. 1-90
Defrosting / Defogging ................................................................. 1-91
Fan speed control (Blower control) ............................................. 1-85
Temperature control .................................................................... 1-89
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................................... 1-75
Hood Release .................................................................................... 1-77
Horn ................................................................................................. 1-80
How to Use Luggage Room ............................................................. 1-71
I
Ignition Switch ...................................................................................... 2-4
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ........................................... 1-42
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................................... 1-58
Interior Light ....................................................................................... 1-63
J
Jump Starting ...................................................................................... 3-3
K
Keys ................................................................................................... 1-3
If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-15
Positions ......................................................................................... 2-4

L
Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................................. 6-26
Luggage Compartment Light ............................................................ 1-70
Luggage Net ...................................................................................... 1-74
M
Maintenance Intervals
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............................... 5-7
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ............................... 5-6
Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4
Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rear View Mirror With Compass ................ 1-67
Day-night inside rearview mirror ................................................. 1-67
Outside rearview mirror ............................................................... 1-65
Outside rearview mirror Heater .................................................. 1-66
O
Odometer / Trip Odometer ............................................................... 1-50
Occupant Classification System ...................................................... 1-35
P
Parking Brake .................................................................................... 1-69
Power Outlet ...................................................................................... 1-59
Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................... 6-24

INDEX

10
5

R
Rear Seat
Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................. 1-15
Folding rear seatback .................................................................. 1-15
Rear Window Defroster Switch ........................................................ 1-57
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................................. 8-14
Risk of Rollover ................................................................................... 2-3
Roof Rack ......................................................................................... 1-74
S
Seat
Front ............................................................................................. 1-12
Rear .............................................................................................. 1-15
Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-14
Seat Belts
3-point system ............................................................................. 1-20
Pretensioner seat belt .................................................................. 1-28
Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-21
Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-19
Precautions .................................................................................. 1-17
Shop Manual ...................................................................................... 8-11
Shopping Bag Holders ...................................................................... 1-70
Sound
Brake pad warning sound ............................................................ 1-48
Spark Plugs ....................................................................................... 6-10
Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-64
Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-49
Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-6

Steering Wheel Free play ................................................................. 6-19
Steering Wheel Tilt Lever .................................................................. 1-79
Stereo Sound System .................................................................... 1-101
Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-60
Sun Visor ........................................................................................... 1-78
T
Tachometer ....................................................................................... 1-49
Tail Gate ............................................................................................ 1-69
Tail gate window ........................................................................... 1-69
Theft-Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-8
Ticket Holder ..................................................................................... 1-79
Tires
Balancing ........................................................................................ 8-9
Chains ............................................................................................ 8-9
Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-7
If you have a flat tire ....................................................................... 3-6
Information ...................................................................................... 8-2
Maintenance ................................................................................. 8-11
Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3
Replacement ................................................................................ 8-10
Rotation .......................................................................................... 8-9
Sidewall Labeling ............................................................................ 8-4
Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-8
Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5
Terminology and Definition ............................................................ 8-6

10 INDEX
6
Traction ........................................................................................ 8-10
Towing
A trailer (or vehicle) ...................................................................... 2-23
Emergency ................................................................................... 3-14
If your car must be towed ............................................................ 3-12
Traction Control System ................................................................... 2-12
Transaxle
Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-8
Automatic transaxle fluid checking .............................................. 6-14
Manual ............................................................................................ 2-6
Manual transaxle oil checking ..................................................... 6-13
Trip Computer ................................................................................... 1-50
V
Vehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2
Vechcle Load Limit ............................................................................ 2-27
Vehicle Specifications
Engine ............................................................................................. 9-3
Lubrication chart .................................................................. 9-4 ~ 9-5
Measurement ................................................................................. 9-2
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................................ 1-44
Windows
Power ........................................................................................... 1-11
Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................................... 1-54
Rear Window wiper and washer switch ...................................... 1-55
Windshield Wiper Blade De-icer ....................................................... 1-57
Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-12
Winter Driving .................................................................................... 2-21

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER
ADDRESS
CITY

STATE

ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME

DEALER NO.

ADDRESS
CITY

STATE

ZIP CODE

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
FUEL:
UNLEADED gasoline only
Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY
US.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 2.7L: 17 (14.3, 65), 2.0L: 15 (12.8, 58)

TIRE PRESSURE:
See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:
See pages 8-2 through 8-13.

HOOD RELEASE:
Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:
API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel
efficient oil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures
are above 0°F (-18°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 65 or 9-4.

Seoul Korea

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil level
should be up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:
Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selector lever
through all ranges and return to “N” (Neutral) position. Then check the
level of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,
DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP III or other brands approved by
Hyundai Motor Co.,

QUICK INDEX
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2
Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6
Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-44 ~ 1-47
Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4
Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-12
Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-5
Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3
Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4
Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-14

Printing: OCT. 22, 2004
Publication No.: A2EO-EU40C
Printed in Korea

Jmhma 11.p65 2005 Tucson

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation